Automation and Relay Functions - Catalogue 2003.12
Automation and Relay Functions - Catalogue 2003.12
Automation and Relay Functions - Catalogue 2003.12
Catalogue December
2003
2004
2003
Data-processing, Communication Control and Protection, Detection, Data-processing, Man-Machine dialogue
To be issued
Automation and control Mounting systems
2003 2004
2003 2003
Detection
AUTC201108140EN
Transparent factory The future of automation
AUTC201104124EN
Momentum automation platform
2003 2002
AUTC201384126EN
Quantum automation platform
AUTC201496125EN
Premium automation platform
2003 2003
AUTC101272123EN
Nano programmable controllers and Micro automation platform
2001
- Global Detection, - AS-Interface, - Control and connection components, - Motor starter solutions (Control and protection components), - Soft starters and variable speed drives
Twin Line Motion control
AUTC20176206EN
AUTCD21124207EN
2003
2002
2003
2001
2001
Man-Machine dialogue
Detection
Photo-electric detectors
Limit switches
Connectors
Encoders
Data processing
IP 67 splitter boxes
Interfaces
Control relays
Human-Machine dialogue
Control and signalling units Cam switches Control stations Pendant control stations Operator dialogue terminals Industrial control stations Integrated Human-Machine Illuminated beacons and indicator banks interfaces
tico 732
E 6
5 4 R
3 2
Foot switches
Communication
Communication architecture: Ethernet network, Modbus Plus network, Fipway network, AS-i bus, Fipio bus, CANopen bus, Uni-Telway bus, Modbus bus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, asynchronous serial links
Supervision
Power distribution
Prefadis service poles and posts, lighting poles Canalis busbar trunking for lighting distribution Canalis busbar trunking for low and medium power distribution Canalis busbar trunking for high power distribution Mobile distribution: Canalis track section and cable carriers
Services
Technical information
General contents
1/0
Contents
Selection guide for compact and modular base controllers . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 # Compact base controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/8 # Modular base controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14
Selection guide for discrete I/O modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 # Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
Selection guide for analogue I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26 # Analogue I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30 # Master module for AS-Interface bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33 # Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/35 # Communication protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36 # Pre-wired solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/39 # TwidoSoft programming software 5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/41 5 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/42 5 Integrated functions, software set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/43 5 Integrated counter and positioning functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/44 5 TwidoSoft programming software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
1/1
Selection guide
Applications
Discrete I/O
10 16 6 sink/source $ 24 V inputs 9 sink/source $ 24 V inputs (1) (1) 4 relay outputs 7 relay outputs Non-removable screw terminal block
I/O expansion
Number of expansion modules Discrete I/O modules Analogue I/O modules AS-Interface (3)
4 discrete, analogue and 8, 16 or 32 $ 24 V inputs; 2 x 12 bit inputs; 1 x 12 bit output Management of slave modules:
Maximum number of I/O per configuration (base controller with I/O expansion module)
10
16
88 with screw terminal I/O expansion modules (4) 152 with HE 10 connector I/O expansion module
5 kHz counting
20 kHz counting
3 x 16 bit counting channels (0...65535 points): - dedicated $ 24 V discrete inputs of the base controller - up/down counting with preset 1 x 16 bit counting channel (0...65535 points): - dedicated $ 24 V discrete inputs for incremental encoder or proximity sensors - up/down counting, up counter, down counter and frequency meter
7 kHz positioning
Functions
For all controller versions 2.0 For all controller versions 2.0
Communication
1 RS 485 serial port (mini-DIN connector) 1 optional serial port: RS 232C (mini-DIN connector) or RS 485 (mini-DIN connector or screw terminals)
Supply voltage
Programming
Application memory Internal bits Internal words (5) Standard function blocks (5) Double words Floating, Trigonometrical Real-time clock Languages Software
Yes Optional TWD XCP RTC real time clock cartridge, using 16 real-time clock blocks Reversible languages: Ladder language and Instruction List language (with Grafcet instructions) TwidoSoft running under Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000 and Windows XP
Page 1/8 (1) Sink input: positive logic. Source input: negative logic. (2) Within the consumption limit controlled by TwidoSoft software. (3) The AS-Interface M3 profile supports analogue profile 7.3 (7 slaves), but not analogue profile S-7.4.
1/2
20 12 sink/source $ 24 V inputs (1) 8 sink or source transistor outputs (depending on model) HE 10 connector AS-Interface I/O modules (2) 6 relay outputs and 2 transistor source outputs Removable screw terminal block
40 24 sink/source $ 24 V inputs (1) 16 sink or source transistor outputs (depending on model) HE 10 connector
8, 16 or 32 $ 24 V or relay outputs; 4 $ 24 V inputs/4 relay outputs or 16 $ 24 V inputs/8 relay outputs, connection by screw or spring terminals and by HE 10 connector or 2 inputs/1 x 12 bit output, connection by screw terminals discrete (max. 62 modules), analogue (max. 7 modules). For all controller versions 2.0
84 with screw terminal I/O expansion module 148 with HE 10 connector I/O expansion module
132 with screw terminal I/O expansion module 244 with HE 10 connector I/O expansion module
152 with screw terminal I/O expansion module 264 with HE 10 connector I/O expansion module
2 x 16 bit channels (0...65535 points): - dedicated discrete inputs of the base controller - up/down counting with preset 2 x 16 bit channels (0...65535 points): - dedicated $ 24 V discrete inputs for incremental encoders or proximity sensors - up/down counting, up counter, down counter, frequency meter 2 channels: PWM function (pulse width modulation output) and PLS function (pulse generator output)
For all controller versions 2.0 For all controller versions 2.0
$ 24 V power supply
3000 instructions, 6000 with memory extension cartridge TWD XCP MFK64
1/14 (4) With maximum of 42 relay outputs (on base controller and I/O expansions). (5) The maximum values of the internal words and function blocks cannot be cumulated. (6) Replace the / in the reference with T: source transistor outputs, U: sink transistor outputs
1/3
Presentation
Presentation
The Twido range of compact programmable controllers offers an "all-in-one" solution in a compact overall size (80/95 x 90 x 70 mm).Three base controllers are available, differing in their processing capacity and their number of $ 24 V inputs and relay outputs (10, 16 and 24 I/O). All these compact base controllers use an a.c. power supply between 100 and 240 V and provide a $ 24 V supply to the sensors. This type of compact base controller offers the following advantages:
TWD LCAA 10DRF
# A significant number of I/O (up to 24 I/O) in a small overall size, so reducing the size of consoles or panels for applications where space is an important factor. # A variety of expansion options and product options offer the user a degree of flexibility which is generally only available with larger automation platforms. The TWD LCAA 24DRF 24 I/O compact base controller can take up to 4 discrete I/O expansion modules (corresponding to a 64 I/O configuration), optional modules such as a digital display, memory cartridge and real-time clock cartridge, as well as an additional RS 485 or RS 232C communication port. # The compact controller solution also allows great wiring flexibility. For expansion modules (with base controller TWD LCAA 24DRF) several types of connection are offered, such as removable screw terminal blocks, and spring type connections which allow simple, fast and safe wiring. The TwidoFast system provides a pre-wired cabling solution, allowing connection of modules with HE 10 connectors to: 5 pre-formed cables with free wires at one end for direct connection to sensors/ preactuators, 5 TwidoFast kits (connection cables plus Telefast sub-base). # The display and plug-in memory options allow easy adjustment, transfer and backup of applications: 5 the digital display can be used as a local display and adjustment tool, 5 the EEPROM technology in the memory modules allows backup and transfer of programs to any Twido compact or modular controller. # TwidoSoft software allows easy programming using instruction list language instructions or ladder language graphic objects. It uses the same objects and sets of instructions as those used by PL7-07 software for Nano programmable controllers. TwidoSoft software allows existing Nano PLC applications to be reused with Twido controllers by importing an ASCII file. # Compact controllers have 2 analogue adjustment points (only one for 10 I/O controllers) accessible on the front panel. These adjustable values are stored in system words and are updated at every scan.
I/O expansion No
Optional cartridge 1 slot: real-time clock or memory 1 slot: real-time clock or memory
1 point 01023
No
Yes
14
10
1 point 1 x RS 485, Yes, 4 max Yes 1 slot: 01023 + option of (1) real-time clock 1 point 1 x RS 232C/485 or memory 0511 (1) I.e.: a maximum of 88 I/O with screw terminal expansion modules, with a maximum of 32 relay outputs in I/O expansion modules. Maximum of 152 I/O with HE 10 connector expansion modules.
1/4
Description
Description
Twido TWD LCAA // DRF compact programmable base controllers comprise: 2 3 4 5 1 6 7 1 Two hinged connection terminal block covers for access to the terminals. 2 A hinged access door. 3 A mini-DIN type RS 485 serial port connector (allowing connection of the programming terminal). 4 A slot (protected by a removable cover) for digital diagnostic/maintenance display module TWD XCP ODC. 5 A screw terminal block for $ 24 V supply to the sensors and for connection of the input sensors. 6 A connector for I/O expansion modules TWD D//, TWD A// and TWD NOI 10M3 (maximum of 4 on 24 I/O models). 7 A display block showing: - the status of the controller (PWR, RUN, ERR and STAT), - the inputs and outputs (IN/ and OUT/). 8 A screw terminal block for connection of the output preactuators. 9 Two analogue adjustment points (one point for 10 and 16 I/O models). 10 An extension connector for the addition of a 2nd RS 232C/RS 485 serial port using adapter TWD NAC /// (for 16 and 24 I/O models). 11 A screw terminal block for connection of the " 100...240 V mains power supply 12 A connector for the TWD XCP MFK32 memory cartridge or TWD XCP RTC realtime clock cartridge (access through the bottom of the controller). Compact base controllers can be mounted on a symmetrical DIN rail, mounting plate or panel (2 x 4.3 holes).
1 8 12 11 10 9
1/5
Characteristics
Operation Storage
C C
rail
Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance Backup battery Data backed up Autonomy Battery type Charging time Life
0+ 55 - 25+ 70 30 to 95 %, without condensation IP 20 02000 03000 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 57150 Hz 9.8 (1 gn) 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, acceleration 25100 Hz 39.2 (4 gn) 147 (15 gn) for 11 ms Internal RAM: internal variables, internal bits and words, timers, counters, shift registers... Approximately 30 at 25 C with fully charged battery Lithium battery, not interchangeable Approximately 15 to charge from 090% of the full charge 10 TWD LCAA 10DRF TWD LCAA 16DRF TWD LCAA 24DRF 6 9 14 4 relay 7 relay 10 relay Non-removable screw terminal block 4 88/152 (1) Management of slave modules: 62 (discrete), 7 (analogue) 700 instructions 2000 instructions 3000 instructions 1 for 1000 logic instructions 0.5 128 256 3000 64 128 128 Yes " 100240 " 85264 35 40 250 20 22 33 (base with 4 I/O expansion modules) 30 31 40 (base with 4 I/O expansion modules) Built-in serial link RS 485 Optional serial interface adapter (3) RS 232C, with adapter TWD NAC 232D RS 485, with adapter TWD NAC 485/
Base controller type Number of $ 24 V inputs Number and type of outputs Connection of I/O I/O expansion modules Max. no. of modules Max. no. of I/O AS-Interface Application memory capacity Cycle time Processing time System overhead Data memory Internal bits Internal words (2) Timers (2) Counters (2) Double words Power supply Rated voltage Voltage range Maximum inrush current $ 24 V sensor supply Maximum power " 100 V required " 264 V
ms ms
V V A mA VA VA
Communication
Function Port type Maximum data rate Isolation between internal circuit and serial port Programming terminal connection Communication protocols Remote Link I/O K bits/s
38.4 Not isolated Half-duplex terminal port Modbus Master/Slave RTU ASCII character mode Yes, see page 1/37
No
Integrated functions
Counter Number of points Frequency Capacity 24 I/O base controllers 10/16/24 I/O base controllers 24 I/O base controllers 4 3 channels at 5 kHz (function FCi), 1 channel at 20 kHz (function VFCi) 16 bits (0...65535 points) For controller versions 2.0 For controller versions 2.0 1 point adjustable from 01023 points 1 point adjustable from 0511 points (1) The first value corresponds to the maximum number of I/O (base controller and expansion module) with screw or spring terminal expansion modules, the second value is for HE 10 connector expansion modules. (2) The maximum values cannot be cumulated. (3) With 16 I/O base controller TWD LCAA 16DRF and 24 I/O base controller TWD LCAA 24DRF.
1/6
Characteristics (continued)
$ input characteristics
Base controller type Number of input channels Rated input voltage Commons Input voltage range Rated input current Input impedance Filter time At state 1 At state 0 Isolation V V mA k s s TWD LCAA 10DRF TWD LCAA 16DRF TWD LCAA 24DRF 6 9 14 $ 24 sink/source (positive or negative logic) 1 $ 20.4...28.8 11 mA for I0.0 and I0.1, 7 mA for other inputs I0.i 2.1 k for I0.0 and I0.1, 3.4 k for other inputs I0.i 35 s programmed filter time for I0.0I0.5, 40 s or programmed filter time for other inputs I0.i 45 s programmed filter time for I0.0I0.5, 150 s or programmed filter time for other inputs I0.i No isolation between points, isolation with internal logic by photocouplers 4 2 per channel, 8 per common 3 N/O contacts 1 N/O contact 0.1/0.1 $ V (reference value) 7 10
Minimum switching load Contact resistance (when new) Loads (resistive, inductive)
At state 1 At state 0
$5V $ 24 V $5V
V mA mA mA
30 max 2A/" 240 V or 2A/$ 30 V (with 1800 operations/hour max): - electrical life: minimum 100 000 operations, - mechanical life: minimum 20 x 106 operations. "1 500 for 1 minute 24 30 26 40 5 5
36 55 5
1/7
References
References
0.360 0.360
XBT N401
ASI ABLM3024
1/8
Dimensions, connections
Dimensions
TWD LCAA 10DRF/16DRF/24DRF
Installation rules 70 a 20 20
90
40
40
80
20 4,5
20
a 80 80 95
Important: # Vertical mounting: not permissible for temperatures 4 40 C, upside down flat mounting not permissible. # Avoid placing devices which generate heat (transformers, power supplies, power contactors...) beneath the controller.
Connections
Connection of $ 24 V inputs
TWD LCAA 10DRF/16DRF/24DRF
Connection to sink inputs (positive logic) with sensors powered by the base controller. TWD LCAA 16DRF
Connection to source inputs (negative logic) with sensors powered by the base controller. TWD LCAA 24DRF
1/9
Presentation
Presentation
The modular programmable controller range includes five base controllers, which differ in their processing capacity and their number and type of I/O (20 or 40 I/O with connection by screw terminal block or HE 10 connector, with relay or sink/source transistor outputs). They can be fitted with any of the I/O expansion modules in the range (18 discrete and analogue modules). All these modular base controllers use a $ 24 V power supply.
TWD LMDA 20DTK/20DUK
These modular base controllers offer: # Modular design to adapt to the needs of the application by using a base controller which can be fitted with up to 4 or 7 discrete or analogue I/O expansion modules (depending on the model). # A variety of options which offer the user a degree of flexibility which is generally only available with larger automation platforms. TWD LMDA modular base controllers can be fitted simultaneously with an optional memory cartridge module, a real-time clock cartridge module and a digital display module or serial interface module; both of the latter two modules allow the addition of a second RS 485 or RS 232C communication port.
# The modular controller solution also allows great wiring flexibility. Several types of connection are offered, such as removable screw terminal blocks, spring type connections or HE 10 connectors which allow simple, fast and safe wiring. The TwidoFast system provides a pre-wired cabling solution, allowing connection of modules with HE 10 connectors to: 5 pre-formed cables with free wires at one end for direct connection to sensors/ preactuators, 5 TwidoFast kits (connection cables plus Telefast sub-base). # TwidoSoft software allows easy programming using instruction list language instructions or ladder language graphic objects. It uses the same objects and sets of instructions as those used by PL7-07 software for Nano programmable controllers. TwidoSoft software allows existing Nano PLC applications to be reused with Twido controllers by importing an ASCII file. # Modular base controllers include: 5 1 analogue voltage input, 0...10 V 9 bits (512 points), 5 1 analogue adjustment point accessible on the front panel. This point can be set to a value between 0 and 1024. This adjustable value from 0...1023 points is stored in system words and is updated at every scan.
Outputs
Type of connection
Serial ports
I/O expansion
12 sink/source
8 source transistor
12 sink/source
12 sink/source
24 sink/source
24 sink/source
HE 10 connector 1 x RS 485, + option of 1 x RS 232C/485 8 sink transistor HE 10 connector 1 x RS 485, + option of 1 x RS 232C/485 6 relay, Removable 1 x RS 485, 2 source screw terminal + option of transistor block 1 x RS 232C/485 16 source HE 10 1 x RS 485, transistor connectors + option of 1 x RS 232C/485 16 sink transistor HE 10 1 x RS 485, connectors + option of 1 x RS 232C/485
4 modules
4 modules
7 modules
7 modules
7 modules
Interface module extension 1 module: display or serial link 1 module: display or serial link 1 module: display or serial link 1 module: display or serial link 1 module: display or serial link
Optional cartridge 2 slots: real-time clock and memory 2 slots: real-time clock and memory 2 slots: real-time clock and memory 2 slots: real-time clock and memory 2 slots: real-time clock and memory
1/10
Description
Description
1 2 3 4 Twido TWD LMDA /0 D// base controllers comprise: On the front panel: 1 A hinged door. 5 9 6 2 An analogue adjustment point. 3 A connector for connection of the built-in analogue input. 4 A display block showing: - the status of the controller (PWR, RUN, ERR and STAT), - the status of the inputs and outputs (INi and OUTi). 5 A mini-DIN type RS 485 serial port connector (allowing connection of the programming terminal). 6 Two slots (protected by a removable cover) for memory cartridge TWD XCP MFK// and real-time clock cartridge TWD XCP RTC. 7 One (or more) HE 10 type connector(s) or screw terminal block for connection of the input sensors/output preactuators. 8 Screw terminals for connection of the $ 24 V mains power supply.
On the right-hand side panel: 9 A connector for I/O expansion modules TWD D//, TWD A// and TWD NOI 10M3 (4 or 7 depending on model). On the left-hand side panel: A connector for display module TWD XCP ODM or serial interface module TWD NOZ //// (not visible). Modular base controllers are mounted on a symmetrical DIN rail. Fixing kit TWD XMT5 (supplied in lots of 5) allows plate or panel mounting.
Example of configuration with expansion modules and extension Shown opposite, an example configuration consisting of a TWD LMDA 20DRT modular base controller with: # built-in display module TWD XCP ODM on the left, # two I/O expansion modules TWD DDI 8DT and TWD DDO 16K on the right. The modular base controller is fitted with real-time clock cartridge TWD XCP RTC and memory extension cartridge TWD XCP MFK64.
1/11
Characteristics
rail
Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance Backup battery Data backed up Autonomy Battery type Charging time Life
Base controller type Number of $ 24 V inputs Number and type of outputs (1)
Connection of I/O
Max. no. of modules Max. no. of I/O AS-Interface Application memory capacity Cycle time Data memory Processing time System overhead Internal bits Internal words (3) Timers (3) Counters (3) Double words Floating, Trigonometrical Rated voltage Voltage range Maximum input current Maximum inrush current Consumption ms s
Power supply
V V mA A W
Operation: 0+ 55; Storage: - 25+ 70 30 to 95 %, without condensation IP 20 Operation: 02000; Storage: 03000 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 57150 Hz 9.8 (1 gn) 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, acceleration 25100 Hz 39.2 (4 gn) 147 (15 gn) for 11 ms Internal RAM: internal variables, internal bits and words, timers, counters, shift registers... Approximately 30 at 25 C with fully charged battery Lithium battery, not interchangeable Approximately 15 to charge from 090% of the full charge 10 LMDA 20DTK LMDA 20DUK LMDA 20DRT LMDA 40DTK LMDA 40DUK 12 24 8 8 6 relay, 16 16 source transistor sink transistor 2 source source transistor sink transistor transistor HE 10 connector Removable HE 10 connector screw terminal block 4 7 84/148 (2) 132/244 (2) 152/264 (2) Management of slave modules: 62 (discrete), 7 (analogue) 3000 instructions 3000 instructions, 6000 with memory cartridge TWD XCP MFK64 1 for 1000 logic instructions 0.5 256 3000 128 128 Yes Yes $ 24 $ 20.426.4 including ripple 560 at 26.4 V 700 at 26.4 V 50 15 (base with 4 I/O expansion modules) 19 (base with 7 I/O expansion modules) Built-in serial link RS 485 Optional serial interface module (4) RS 232C, with module TWD NOZ 232D RS 485, with module TWD NOZ 485/
Communication
Function Port type Maximum data rate Isolation between internal circuit and serial port Programming terminal connection Communication protocols Remote Link I/O K bits/s
38.4 Not isolated Half-duplex terminal port No Modbus Master/Slave RTU. ASCII character mode Yes, see page 1/35 4 2 channels at 5 kHz (function FCi), 2 channels at 20 kHz (function VFCi) 16 bits (0...65535 points) 2 7 PWM, pulse width modulation output; PLS, pulse generator output 1 channel 0...10 V 9 bits (0...511 points) 100 For controller versions 2.0 For controller versions 2.0 1 point adjustable from 01023 points
Integrated functions
Counter Number of points Frequency Capacity Number of points Frequency Functions Number of channels Range Resolution Input impedance
Positioning
kHz
Analogue input
k PID Event processing Analogue adjustment points (1) Source output: positive logic, sink output: negative logic. (2) The first value corresponds to the maximum number of I/O (base controller and expansion module) with screw or spring terminal expansion modules, the second value is for HE 10 connector expansion modules. (3) The maximum values cannot be cumulated. (4) Or with serial interface adapter TWD NAC //// fitted in built-in display module TWD XCP ODM.
1/12
Characteristics (continued)
$ input characteristics
Base controller type Number of input channels Rated input voltage Commons Input voltage range Rated input current Input impedance Filter time At state 1 At state 0 Isolation TWD V V mA k s s LMDA 20DTK LMDA 20DUK LMDA 20DRT LMDA 40DTK LMDA 40DUK 12 24 $ 24 sink/source (positive or negative logic) 1 2 $ 20.4...26.4 5 mA for I0.0 and 10.1, 10.6 and I0.7, 7 mA for other inputs I0.i 5.7 k for I0.0 and I0.1, 10.6 and 10.7, 4.7 k for other inputs I0.i 35 s for I0.0 and I0.1, I0.6 and I0.7, 40 s for other inputs I0.i 45 s for I0.0 and I0.1, I0.6 and I0.7, 150 s other inputs I0.i No isolation between channels, isolation with internal logic by photocouplers 8 2 16 Source Sink Source Sink 1 2 24 0.3 20.428.8 0.36 1 5 s for Q 0.0 and Q 0.1, 300 s for other outputs Q 0.i 5 s for Q 0.0 and Q 0.1, 300 s for other outputs Q 0.i 1 max 1 0.1 39 8 No isolation between channels, isolation with internal logic by photocouplers 6 2 per channel, 8 per common 3 N/O contacts 2 N/O contacts 1 N/O contact 0.1/0.1 $ V (reference value) 30 max 2/" 240 V, 2/$ 30 V (2) "1 500 for 1 minute 30 40 5
V A V A A s s V A mA V W
Minimum switching load Contact resistance (when new) Loads (resistive, inductive) rms insulation voltage Consumption for all the outputs
1/13
References
References
12 $ 24 V I
3000 instructions TWD LMDA 20DTK (2) 3000 instructions TWD LMDA 20DUK (2) 3000 instructions (1) TWD LMDA 20DRT
24 $ 24 V I
3000 instructions (1) TWD LMDA 40DTK (2) 3000 instructions (1) TWD LMDA 40DUK (2)
Separate components
Description 32 Kb memory cartridge 64 Kb memory cartridge (3) TWD LMDA 20DRT Real-time clock cartridge Serial interface module Digital display module Fixing kit (Sold in packs of 5) Application Application backup Program transfer Memory extension Application backup Program transfer Date-stamping, RTC based programming See page 1/35 See page 1/35 For fitting modular base controllers or extensions on a mounting plate Type EEPROM EEPROM Reference TWD XCP MFK32 TWD XCP MFK64 Weight kg 0.005 0.005
TWD XCP RTC TWD NOZ //// TWD XCP ODM TWD XMT5
0.005
Replacement parts
TWD XCP MFK // Screw terminal blocks (Sold in packs of 2) Analogue input cable Description Compact display, 2 lines of 20 characters (alphanumeric display) Compact displays, 4 lines of 20 characters (matrix display) XBT N401 Controller TWD LMDA 20DRT, 13 contacts Controller TWD LMDA 20DRT, 16 contacts Length 1 m Protocol Uni-Telway, Modbus Uni-Telway, Modbus Compatible with PLC types Twido, Nano, Micro, Premium TWD FTB 2T13 TWD FTB 2T16 TWD XCA 2A10M Supply voltage $ 5 V by terminal port on PLC $ 5 V by terminal port on PLC $ 24 V external source Reference XBT N200 Weight kg 0.360
XBT N400
0.360
Twido (4), Nano, Micro, Premium, TSX series 7, Momentum, Quantum Other Modbus slave modules
XBT N401
0.360
Auto Auto
kg 0.180 0.220
24
Regulated switch mode " 100240 30 + 24 power supplies for single-phase AS-Interface bus(7) wide range (1) 6000 instructions with memory extension cartridge TWD XCP MFK64 (2) Connection by HE 10 connector, see TwidoFast pre-formed cable and Telefast 2 pre-wired system, page 1/39. (3) Memory extension with base controllers TWD LMDA 20DRT/40D/K. (4) Connection via built-in port or via optional serial port on Twido programmable controllers. (5) These products do not conform to standard EN 61000-3-2. (6) Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product. (7) With earth fault detection. ASI ABLM3024
48 72 120 2 x 72
2 3 5 2.4 + 3
1/14
Dimensions, connections
Dimensions
TWD LMDA 20D/K/20DRT/40D/K
b a 20 20 Installation rules
90
80
80 80
4,5 a TWD LMDA 20DTK/DUK 35.4 TWD LMDA 20DRT 47.5 TWD LMDA 40DTK/DUK 47.5 b 0 (excluding connector) 14.6 0 (excluding connector)
20 20
Important: # Horizontal or flat mounting not permissible. # Avoid placing devices which generate heat (transformers, power supplies, power contactors...) beneath the controller. TWD LMDA 20DRT
Connections
TWD LMDA 20DTK TWD LMDA 20DUK
(1) (2)
5 The COM (+) and COM (-) terminals are interconnected internally. 5 The COM and COM (+), COM and COM (-) terminals are independent. 5 The -V and +V terminals are interconnected internally. TWD LMDA 40DTK TWD LMDA 40DUK
5 Output channels 0 and 1 are of the source transistor type. Output channels 2 to 7 are of the relay type. 5 The COM terminals are independent.
(1) (2)
(2) (1)
(1) (2) 5 5 5 5
(2) (1) (1) Supply connection for sink inputs (positive logic). (2) Supply connection for source inputs (negative logic).
Connectors CN1 and CN2 are independent. The COM (+) and COM (-) terminals are interconnected internally. The COM and COM (+), COM and COM (-) terminals are independent. The -V and +V terminals are interconnected internally.
1/15
Selection guide
Applications
Type
8 $ 24 V inputs
16 $ 24 V inputs
32 $ 24 V inputs
Connection
HE 10 connector
Inputs
Voltage ranges Input current Input logic Commons Response time 5 Energisation 5 De-energisation
$ 20.4...28.8 V 7 mA per point Sink/source (1) 1 common point 2 common points 5 mA per point
4 ms 4 ms
Outputs
Output types Voltage range Commons Output current 5 Per output 5 Per group of channels
Isolation
Page
1/22 (1) Sink input : positive logic, source input : negative logic.
1/16
# For controller versions 2.0 # Management of slave modules: 5 Discrete: maximum of 62 slaves arranged in 2 banks, A/B, of 31 addresses each 5 Analogue: maximum of 7 slaves in bank A # The AS-Interface M3 profile supports analogue profile 7.3 (7 slaves), but does not support analogue profile S-7.4
4 ms 4 ms
2 A (Ith) 7 A (Ith)
Between input channels : common point, between output channels : common point Between bus and channels : by photocoupler
1/17
Applications
Type
8 $ 24 V transistor outputs
8 relay outputs
16 relay outputs
Connection
Inputs
Voltage range Input current Input logic Commons Response time 5 Energisation 5 De-energisation
Outputs
Output types Voltage range Logic (1) Commons Output current 5 Per output 5 Per group of channels
2 A max. 7 A max.
8 A max.
Isolation
Between channels: common point. Between bus and channels: " 1500 V for 1 minute.
TWD DDO 8UT TWD DDO 8TT TWD DRA 8RT TWD DRA 16RT
1/22 (1) Source output : positive logic, sink output : negative logic.
Page
1/18
16 $ 24 V transistor outputs
16 $ 24 V transistor outputs
32 $ 24 V transistor outputs
32 $ 24 V transistor outputs
HE 10 connector
Transistor $ 20.4...28.8 V Sink 1 common point Source Sink 2 common points Source
1/19
Presentation, description
Presentation
The range of Twido I/O modules includes input modules, output modules and mixed input/output modules. With the 14 I/O modules offered, in addition to the I/O integrated in 24 I/O compact base controllers and modular base controllers, configurations can be adapted to best suit application requirements, so optimising costs. The following discrete I/O modules are available : # 4 $ 24 V discrete input modules comprising an 8-channel module, two 16-channel modules and a 32-channel module, equipped with either removable screw terminal blocks or HE 10 type connector, depending on the model. These modules can be either sink or source. # 8 discrete output modules comprising two output modules with 8 and 16 relay outputs, three output modules with 8, 16 or 32-channel "sink" transistor outputs and three output modules with 8, 16 or 32-channel "source" transistor outputs, equipped with either removable screw terminal blocks or HE 10 type connector, depending on the model. # 2 discrete mixed input and output modules, comprising one 4-channel input/ 4-channel relay output module with removable screw terminal block and one 16-channel input/8-channel relay output module with non-removable spring terminal block. The narrow width of these I/O modules (17.5 mm, 23.5 mm, 29.7 mm or 39.1 mm) makes it possible to build Twido configurations of up to 264 I/O with a minimal overall size of L 255.4 mm x H 90 mm x D 81.3 mm. All these discrete I/O modules and the analogue I/O modules are connected to the base controller by stacking them on a DIN rail, starting from the right-hand side panel of the base controller, according to the following rules : 5 For the 24 I/O compact base controller TWD LCAA 24DRF: 4 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/6). 5 For 20 I/O modular base controllers TWD LMDA 20D/K: 4 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/13). 5 For 20 and 40 I/O base controllers TWD LMDA 20DRT/40D/K: 7 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/13). All the discrete I/O modules are electrically isolated with the use of a photocoupler between the internal electronic circuit and the input/output channels.
Description
4 1 2
An extension connector for electrical connection to the previous module (1). One or two blocks for displaying the channels and module diagnostics. One or two connection components of varying type, depending on the model : removable screw terminal block (1 or 2) for modules whose reference ends in T, HE 10 connector (1 or 2) for modules whose reference ends in K, non-removable spring terminal block for module TWD DMM 24DRF. Latching mechanism for attachment to the previous module.
These modules are mounted on a symmetrical DIN rail. Fixing kit TWD XMT 5 (supplied in lots of 5) allows plate or panel mounting. For modules with removable screw terminal block, the terminal blocks are supplied with the module.
(1) A connector on the right-hand side panel ensures continuity of the electrical link with the next I/O module.
1/20
Characteristics
General characteristics
Temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Altitude Vibration resistance C Operation : 0+ 55. Storage : - 25+ 70. 30 to 95 %, without condensation IP 20 Operation : 02000. Storage : 03000. 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 57150 Hz 9.8 (1 gn) 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, acceleration 25100 Hz 39.2 (4 gn) 147 (15 gn) for 11 ms DDI 8DT DDI 16DT 8 16 $ 24 sink/source Removable screw terminal block DDI 16DK 16 DDI 32DK 32 DMM 8DRT 4 DMM 24DRF 16
Mounted on
rail
Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance Module type Number of input channels Rated input voltage Connection
HE 10 connector
Commons Input voltage range Rated input current Input impedance Filter time Isolation Internal consumption for all inputs
V mA k ms ms mA mA mA TWD
1 2 $ 20.4...28.8 7 5 7 3.4 4.4 3.4 4 4 No isolation between channels, isolation with internal logic by photocouplers 25 40 35 65 25 (1) 0 20 (1) 5 10 5 (1) DDO 8UT DDO 8TT 8 Sink Source Removable screw terminal block 1 24 0.3 20.428.8 0.36 3 300 300 1 max 1 0.1 39 8 No isolation between channels, isolation with internal logic by photocouplers 10 10 20 20 40 70 5 5 10 DDO 16UK DDO 16TK 16 Sink Source HE 10 connector DDO 32UK 32 Sink 2 0.1 0.12 1
V A V A A s s V A mA V W
$5V $ 24 V $5V
mA mA mA TWD A A mA m A
At state 1 At state 0
$5V $ 24 V $5V
V mA mA mA
1/21
References
1
References
These discrete I/O modules are mounted on symmetrical DIN rails to the right of the Twido base controller. The maximum number of discrete and/or analogue I/O modules which may be mounted depends on the type of base controller:
Type of TWD base Number of modules LCAA 10DRF 0 LCAA 16DRF 0 LCAA 24DRF 4 LMDA 20D/K 4 LMDA 20DRT 7 LMDA 40D/K 7
$ 24 V sink/source
16
32
Removable screw terminal block (supplied) Removable screw terminal block (supplied) HE 10 connector HE 10 connector Connection
0.100
0.065 0.100
Transistor $ 24 V/0.3 A
8, source
1 1 2 2 2
Removable screw terminal block (supplied) Removable screw terminal block (supplied) HE 10 connector HE 10 connector HE 10 connector HE 10 connector Removable screw terminal block (supplied) Removable screw terminal block (supplied) Connection
0.085
TWD DDO 16UK TWD DDO 16TK TWD DDO 32UK TWD DDO 32TK TWD DRA 8RT
0.145
Removable TWD DMM 8DRT screw terminal block (supplied) Non-removable TWD DMM 24DRF spring terminal block
24
0.140
Separate component
Description TWD DDM 8DRT TWD DDM 24DRF Reference See page 1/38 Weight kg
Replacement parts
Description Type Reference TWD FTB 2T10 Weight kg
1/22
Dimensions, connections
Dimensions
Discrete I/O modules
c 70 a TWD DDI 8DT/16DT DDI 16DK DDI 32DK DDO 8UT/8TT DDO 16UK/16TK DDO 32UK/32TK DRA 8RT/16RT DMM 8DRT DMM 24DRF a 23.5 17.6 29.7 23.5 17.6 29.7 23.5 23.5 39.1 c 14.6 11.3 11.3 16.6 11.3 11.3 14.6 14.6 1.0
90
4,5
Connections
$ 24 V input modules
TWD DDI 8DT TWD DDI 16DK
(1) (2) (1) (2) 5 The COM terminals are linked internally. TWD DDI 16DT 5 The COM terminals are linked internally. TWD DDI 32DK
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2) 5 The COM terminals are linked internally. (1) Source input (negative logic) (2) Sink input (positive logic)
(1) (2) 5 The COM0 terminals are linked internally. 5 The COM1 terminals are linked internally.
(1) (2)
1/23
Connections (continued)
Fu Fu Fu
Fu
Terminals : 5 COM (-) are linked internally. 5 COM0 (-) are linked internally. 5 COM1 (-) are linked internally. 5 + V are linked internally. 5 + V0 are linked internally. 5 + V1 are linked internally.
Terminals : 5 COM (+) are linked internally. 5 COM0 (+) are linked internally. 5 COM1 (+) are linked internally. 5 - V are linked internally. 5 - V0 are linked internally. 5 - V1 are linked internally.
1/24
Connections (continued)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1) Terminals : 5 COM0 are linked internally. 5 COM1 are linked internally. 5 COM0 and COM1 are independent (1) Sink output (negative logic) (2) Source output (positive logic)
(2)
(1) (2)
Fu
(3)
(4)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
5 The COM (+) terminals are linked internally (1) Source input (negative logic) (2) Sink input (positive logic) (3) Sink output (negative logic) (4) Source output (positive logic)
5 Terminals COM0, COM1 and COM2 are independent 5 Terminals - V are linked internally.
1/25
Selection guide
Applications
Number of I/O
2 inputs
1 output
Type
Voltage/current
Connection
Inputs
Range
Resolution
Acquisition period
Outputs
Range
0...10 V 4...20 mA
Resolution
Transfer time
External supply
Isolation
Pages
1/26
2 inputs/1 output
Voltage/current
# For controller versions 2.0 # Management of slave modules: 5 Discrete: maximum of 62 slaves arranged in 2 banks, A/B, of 31 addresses each 5 Analogue: maximum of 7 slaves in bank A # The AS-Interface M3 profile supports analogue profile 7.3 (7 slaves), but does not support analogue profile S-7.4
1/27
Presentation, description
Presentation
Twido analogue I/O expansion modules enable the acquisition of various analogue values encountered in industrial applications, such as : # # # # High-level inputs (voltage 010 V or current 420 mA). High-level outputs (voltage 010 V or current 420 mA). Low level inputs from thermocouples type K, J and T. Low level inputs from 3-wire Pt 100 temperature probes, range -100...500 C.
Analogue output modules are used to control the preactuators in devices such as variable speed drives, valves and applications that require process control. The output current or the voltage is proportional to the numerical value defined by the user program. When the Twido controller stops, the outputs can be configured with fallback (reset to the lowest scale value or hold the last value received). This function, when set to hold, is useful when debugging the application or when a fault occurs, in order not to disturb the process being controlled. The 4 following analogue I/O modules are available : # One module with 2 high-level inputs. # One module with 1 high-level input. # One mixed module with 2 inputs and 1 high-level output. # One mixed module with 2 thermocouple or temperature probe inputs and 1 highlevel output. All Twido analogue extension modules offer 12-bit resolution (4096 points) with connection by removable screw terminal block. An external $ 24 V power supply is required for each analogue module. Like discrete I/O modules, analogue I/O modules are connected to the base controller by stacking them on a DIN rail, starting from the right-hand side panel of the base controller, according to the following rules : # For 24 I/O compact base controller TWD LCAA 24DRF : 4 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/6). # For 20 I/O modular base controllers TWD LMDA 20D/K : 4 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/13). # For 40 I/O modular base controllers TWD LMDA 20DRT/40D/K : 7 modules max. (see characteristics page 1/13). All analogue I/O modules are electrically isolated with the use of a photocoupler between the internal electronic circuit and the input/output channels.
Description
Twido analogue I/O modules comprise :
4 1 2
1 An extension connector for electrical connection to the previous module (1). 2 A block for displaying the channels and module diagnostics. 3 A removable screw terminal block for connection of the $ 24 V external power supply, the sensors and the preactuators. 4 A latching mechanism for attachment to the previous module. These modules are mounted on a symmetrical DIN rail. Fixing kit TWD XMT 5 (supplied in lots of 5) allows plate or panel mounting.
3 (1) A connector on the right-hand side panel ensures continuity of the electrical link with the next I/O module.
1/28
Characteristics
General characteristics
Temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Altitude Vibration resistance C Operation : 0+ 55. Storage : - 25+ 70. 30 to 95 %, without condensation IP 20 Operation : 02000. Storage : 03000. 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 57150 Hz 9.8 (1 gn) 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, acceleration 25100 Hz 39.2 (4 gn) 147 (15 gn) for 11 ms TWD AMI 2HT/AMM 3HT 2 high-level inputs Voltage Current 010 V 420 mA TWD ALM 3LT 2 low-level inputs Thermocouple Type K (01300 C) Type J (01200 C) Type T (0400 C)
Mounted on
rail
Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance
Connection Permissible continuous overload External supply Input impedance Max. sampling duration Sampling repetition time Acquisition period Measuring precision Max. error at 25 C
V ms ms ms % PE
Temperature coefficient Repeat accuracy after stabilisation time Non linearity Total error Common mode rejection Cross talk Cabling Dielectric strength Type of protection Consumption
% PE/C % PE % PE % PE
Removable screw terminal block $ 13 V 40 mA Rated voltage : $ 24. Voltage range : $ 20.428.8 1 M min 10 250 max 5 max 16 50 16 50 32 + 1 controller cycle time 100 + 1 controller cycle time 0.2 0.2 + precision of cold 0.2 junction compensation ( 4 C max) 0.006 0.5 0.2 1 - 50 dB 2 low significance bits max. Twisted shielded pair recommended " 500 between the input and the supply circuit Photocoupler between the input and the internal circuit $ 5 V internal supply : 50. $ 24 V external supply : 40 TWD AMO 1HT/AMM 3HT/ALM 3LT 1 output Voltage 010 V 4096 increments (12 bits) 2.5 mV 2000 min Resistive 20 20 + 1 controller scan time
V rms mA
ms ms V % PE % PE/C % PE % PE % PE % PE V rms mA mA
Max. error at 25 C Temperature coefficient Repeat accuracy after stabilisation time Output error Non linearity Output ripple Total error
Rated voltage : $ 24. Voltage range : $ 20.428.8 0.2 0.015 0.5 1 0.2 1 low significance bit max. 1 Twisted shielded pair recommended " 500 between the input and the supply circuit 50 40
1/29
References
References
These analogue I/O expansion modules are mounted on symmetrical DIN rails to the right of the Twido base controller. The sensors/preactuators are connected to a removable screw terminal block (supplied with each module). The maximum number of analogue I/O modules which may be mounted depends on the type of base controller :
Type of TWD controller Number of modules LCAA 10DRF 0 LCAA 16DRF 0 LCAA 24DRF 4 LMDA 20D/K 4 LMDA 20DRT 7 LMDA 40D/K 7
010 V 420 mA 010 V 010 V 420 mA 420 mA Thermocouple 010 V K, J, T 420 mA Temperature probe Pt 100 Application 11 contacts
Replacement part
Description Screw terminal block (Sold in packs of 2) Reference TWD FTB 2T11 Weight kg
1/30
Dimensions, connections
Dimensions
Analogue I/O modules
3,8 23,5
90
4,5
Connections
Input module TWD AMI 2HT Output module TWD AMO 1HT
Voltage/current sensor
Voltage/current preactuator
Voltage/current sensor
# Fit a fuse of appropriate size for the sensor type. # Do not connect any wires to the unused channel.
# Fit a fuse of appropriate size for the preactuator type. # Do not connect any wires if the channel is unused.
Voltage/current preactuator
Voltage/current preactuator
Voltage/current sensor
# Fit a fuse of appropriate size for the sensor and preactuator types. # Do not connect any wires to unused channels.
# Fit a fuse of appropriate size for the sensor and preactuator types. # For a Pt 100 3-wire temperature probe (RTD), connect the three wires to terminals A , B and B (channels IN0 and IN1). # For a Pt 100 2-wire temperature probe (RTD), connect the two wires to terminals A and B and make a bridge between B' and B (channels IN0 and IN1). # For a thermocouple, connect the two wires to the + and - terminals (channels IN0 and/or IN1). # Do not connect any wires to unused channels.
1/31
Presentation, description
Presentation
Master module TWD NOI 10M3 for AS-Interface bus allows the Twido controller (versions 4 2.0) to perform the function of AS-Interface master.
Twido controller + Master module TWD NOI 10M3
Power
Sensors
Indicator bank
AS-Interface bus Control station Safety monitor XBL keypad Motor starter
Safety interface
The bus consists of a Master station (Twido controller) and Slave stations. The Master, which supports the AS-Interface profile, polls each of the devices connected to the AS-Interface bus, in turn, and stores information gathered (sensor/actuator status, operating status of the devices) in the controller memory. Communication on the AS-Interface bus is managed in a way that is totally transparent to the Twido application program. The TWD NOI 10M3 master module manages the following with the AS-Interface M3 profile: 5 discrete slave modules (maximum of 62 slaves arranged in 2 banks, A and B, of 31 addresses each), 5 analogue slaves (maximum of 7 slaves in bank A). The AS-Interface M3 profile supports analogue profile 7.3 (7 slaves), but not analogue profile S-7.4. The maximum number of TWD NOI 10M3 modules per Twido controller is 2. 7 discrete, analogue and AS-Interface I/O modules are controlled by TwidoSfot software, see page 1/40. An AS-Interface power supply is essential to supply the various modules on the bus. It should preferably be located close to the stations with high power consumption. For more information on power supplies, see pages 1/8 and 1/14.
Description
Module TWD NOI 10M3 takes the form of a standard-size module. It is connected to a Twido base controller (compact or modular) in the same way as any I/O module. 6 1 4 5 It comprises: 1 A display block comprising: # 6 pilot lights indicating the module operating modes: 5 green PWR pilot light: module powered up, 5 red FLT pilot light: error in the configuration loaded, 5 green LMO pilot light: module in local mode, 5 green CMO pilot light: module in connected mode, 5 red CNF pilot light: not used, 5 red OFF pilot light: module in protected, unconnected mode. # 6 green pilot lights, 3 for inputs, 3 for outputs. 2 A block for displaying the status of the addresses. 3 Two pushbuttons PB1 and PB2 for controlling the status of the slaves by selecting their address and changing the mode. 4 An extension connector for electrical connection to the previous module. 5 A connector (on the RH side) for I/O expansion modules TWD D// and TWD A// (4 or 7 depending on version). 6 A latching mechanism for attachment to the previous module. 7 A power supply removable screw terminal block.
TWD NOI 10M3 master module connections Brown wire
1/32
Diagnostics
The 30 pilot lights on the front panel of the module are used in conjunction with the two pushbuttons for diagnostics by the Twido controller. The display block on the front panel of master module TWD NOI 10M3 allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slaves present on the AS-Interface bus.
Software set-up
The AS-Interface bus is configured using TwidoSoft software, see pages 1/40 to 1/47. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity: 5 Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (management transparent to the user). 5 Topological addressing of I/O: any AS-Interface slave defined on the bus has a topological address assigned to it on the bus, in a way that is transparent to the user. 5 Each AS-Interface module sensor/actuator is seen by the Twido programmable controller in the same way as any In-rack" I/O.
General characteristics
Module type AS-Interface profile Type of addressing Product certifications Degree of protection Altitude Temperature Relative humidity Degree of pollution Immunity to corrosion Vibration Mounted on rail resistance Plate or panel mounted (using fixing kit TWD XMT5) Shock resistance As-Interface external power supply Internal current At $ 5 V At $ 24 V AS-Interface consumption at $ 24 V TWD NOI 10M3 AS-Interface M3 , V 2.11 (profile S-7.4 not supported) Standard and extended AS-Interface n 47801 IP 20 Operation: 02000; Transport: 03000 Operation: 0+ 55; Storage: - 25+ 70 30 to 95 % (without condensation) 2 conforming to IEC 60664 Free of corrosive gases 1057, amplitude 0.075 mm, 57150 (acceleration: 9.8 m/s2); for 2 hours on all 3 axes 225, amplitude 1.6 mm, 25100 (acceleration: 39.2 m/s2); for 90 minutes on all 3 axes 147 (15 gn) duration 11 ms, on all 3 axes 29.531.6 80 0 540 3 0.156 x (1 + N) where N = number of active slaves 5 10 7 62 248 = 124 inputs + 124 outputs 434 = 248 inputs + 186 outputs 100 300 30 Reference TWD NOI 10M3 Weight kg 0.085
m C
Hz Hz m/s2 $V mA mA mW ms ms ms ms
Communication characteristics
With 1 to 19 slaves With 20 to 62 slaves With 31 standard slaves or slaves in banks A & B With 62 slaves in banks A and B Analogue modules (1) Max. no. of modules Discrete modules (1) Max. no. of I/O Standard slaves Slaves in banks A and B Max. length of Without splitter block or extension AS-Interface cable With a total of 2 splitter blocks or extensions AS-Interface bus voltage As-Interface bus cycle time
m m $V
References
Description AS-Interface master module for Twido programmable controllers V 4 2.0 Number Protocol/profile Number of I/O per controller (1) 2 AS-Interface/M3 63 discrete modules max. 7 analogue modules max.
Connection accessories
Description Flat cable for AS-Interface bus (yellow) TWD NOI 10M3 Length 20 m 50 m 100 m Reference XZ CB 10201 XZ CB 10501 XZ CB 11001 Weight kg 1.400 3.500 7.000
(1) When analogue and discrete modules are connected simultaneously to the network, the analogue modules use addresses 1 to 31 in bank A. When an analogue module uses a certain address, the module addresses having the same number in bank B cannot be occupied for slaves in banks A/B.
1/33
Presentation, description
Communication
Presentation
In order to communicate with an intelligent environment, Twido compact and modular programmable controllers offer an RS 485 serial communication port on the module as well as an optional type RS 485 or RS 232 link. These two ports allow Twido compact and modular controllers to use four communication protocols: Programming, Modbus, ASCII, and Remote link.
Description
1 Compact base controllers have the following on the front panel: 1 An RS 485 serial port, with mini-DIN type connector for connection to the programming terminal. 2 A slot for fitting a 2nd optional port (RS 485/RS 232) using TWD NAC /// adapters. 2
TWD NAC 485T Compact base controller
Modular base controllers have the following on the front panel: 1 An RS 485 serial port, with mini-DIN type connector for connection to the programming terminal. The slot for fitting a 2nd optional port (RS 485/RS 232) using adapters TWD NAC /// is located behind the removable cover 2 of a TWD NOZ //// interface module 3 or a TWD XCP ODM display module 4. The interface and display modules connect to the left-hand side of modular base controllers. Twido controller communication ports
or
2
TWD NOZ //// TWD XCP ODM Compact base controllers Modular base controllers TWD NAC 485T
Serial port RS 485 mini-DIN All compact base controllers TWD LCAA //// All modular base controllers TWD LMDA ////
Optional port (2nd port) RS 485 RS 232 mini-DIN mini-DIN TWD NAC 485 D (1) TWD NAC 232 D (2)
TWD NOZ 485 D (1) or TWD XCP ODM + TWD NAC 485D
TWD NOZ 232 D (2) or TWD XCP ODM + TWD NAC 232D
TWD NOZ 485 T (1) or TWD XCP ODM + TWD NAC 485T
(1) With max. cable length: 200 m. (2) With max. cable length: 10 m.
If the RS 232 physical layer is used for a length greater than 10 metres, use the RS 485 physical layer and an RS 485/RS 232 conversion module reference XGS Z24.
Connection
Serial link RS 485
8 5 2 7 4 1 6 3
RS 232 D
8 5 2 7 4 1 6 3
RS 485T
SG
TWD LCAA //// TWD NAC 485D TWD NAC 232D TWD NAC 485T TWD LMDA //// TWD NOZ 485D TWD NOZ 232D TWD NOZ 485T 1 A+ A A+ A+ RTS 2 BB BBDTR 3 NPC SG 0 V NC TXD 4 /DE NC RXD 5 /DPT NC DSR 6 NPC NC 0V 7 0V 0V 0V 8 5 V (180 mA) 5 V (180 mA) 5 V (180 mA) NC: not connected NPC: do not connect /DPT: 1 = master; If not connected, the PUNIT protocol is used for communication with PCs (at state 1, 19200 bauds, with no parity); If connected to 0 V, the communication parameters are those configured by the TwidoSoft software.
1/34
References, dimensions
Communication
References
Serial link modules and adapters
Description Serial interface adapters Compatibility Compact base controllers TWD LCAA 16/24DRF Built-in display module TWD XCP ODM Physical layer RS 232C RS 485 Connection Mini-DIN connector Mini-DIN connector Screw terminals Mini-DIN connector Mini-DIN connector Screw terminals Reference TWD NAC 232D TWD NAC 485D TWD NAC 485T TWD NOZ 232D TWD NOZ 485D TWD NOZ 485T Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.085 0.085 0.085
TWD NAC 232D/485D Serial interface modules Modular base controllers TWD LMDA 20/40D// RS 232C RS 485 TWD NAC 485T
Connection accessory
TWD NOZ /// Description Serial link connection cable Link from to Serial interface adapter Modbus module or RS 485 serial interface (RJ 45 connector) module (mini-DIN connector) Supply voltage $ 12/36 V $ 24 V Reference TWD XCA RJ030 Weight kg 0.160
Modems
Description PSTN modem: type WESTERMO TD-33 / V.90, supplied with a telephone cable (length 3 m) GSM modem: type WAVECOM WMOD2B dual band 900/1800 Mhz, supplied with a power cable (length 1.5 m) and clips for plate mounting Accessory kit for GSM modem comprising: a modem cable (length 0.5 m), an antenna with cable (length 3 m), and accessories for mounting on rail Reference SR1 MOD01 SR1 MOD02 Weight kg 0.231 0.127
SR1 KIT02
0.180
Dimensions
Modules TWD NOZ ////XCP ODM
70 a 13,9
90
1/35
Presentation, characteristics
Communication protocols
Programming protocol
1
1
3 4
Link by modem 1 Remote programming PC. 2 Cable TSX PCX 1031 on serial port. 3 Modem for transmitting/receiving data. 4 Telephone or radio link. 5 Twido compact or modular controller.
3 2 5
Link by cable 1 Programming PC. 2 Cable TSX PCX 1031 RS 485 on serial port or USB cable TSX PCX 3030 for Windows 2000 or XP. 3 Twido compact or modular controller.
Characteristics
Protocol type Data rate Physical layer Connection Compatibility Kbit/s Programming 19.2 RS 485 Serial port With compact base controllers TWD LCAA //// and modular base controllers TWD LMDA ////
Modbus protocol
Twido controller connected directly on the Modbus bus 1 Magelis compact display XBT N40/. 2 Cable XBTZ 978 on serial port. 3 Cable for optional RS 485 port. 4 Twido modular controller. 5 Modbus hub LU9 GC3. 6 Modbus tap link cable VW3 A8 306 R//. 7 Line end adapters VW3 A8 306 RC. 8 Modbus T-junctions VW3 A8 306 TF// (with cables). 9 Twido compact controller. 10 Modules: ATS 48 and ATV 28.
2 3
Modbus bus
8 7
7 6
10
Characteristics
Protocol type Data rate Data bits Stop bits Parity Physical layer Connection Compatibility Kbit/s Modbus 1.238.4 Initial value: 19.2 7 or 8 Initial value: 8 1 or 2 Without, even or odd Initial value: without RS 485/RS 232 (point-to-point) Serial port (RS 485) or optional port (RS 485/RS 232) Compact base controllers TWD LCAA //// and modular base controllers TWD LMDA ////
1/36
Presentation, characteristics
Communication protocols
ASCII protocol
1 4 3
Link by modem 1 Simple ASCII display. 2 Standard RS 485 cable or cable TSX PCX 1031 for RS 232 conversion, on serial port. 3 Modem for transmitting/receiving data. 4 Telephone or radio link. 5 Twido compact or modular controller. 6 ASCII printer. 7 Standard RS 485/RS 232 cable on optional port.
3 2
7 6 4 3
5 3
1 2 3 4 5
Link by cable 1 Simple ASCII display. 2 Standard RS 485 cable or cable TSX PCX 1031 for RS 232 conversion, on serial port. 3 Twido compact or modular controller. 4 Standard RS 485/RS 232 cable on optional port. 5 ASCII printer.
Characteristics
Protocol type Data rate Data bits Stop bits Parity Physical layer Connection Compatibility Kbit/s ASCII 1.238.4 Initial value: 19.2 7 or 8 Initial value: 8 1 or 2 Initial value: 1 Without, even or odd Initial value: without RS 485/RS 232 Serial port (RS 485) or optional port (RS 485/RS 232) With compact base controllers TWD LCAA //// and modular base controllers TWD LMDA ////
1
(1)
3
(1)
3
(1)
(1) Connection is made either to the serial port, or to the optional port.
Characteristics
Protocol type Data rate Physical layer Connection Number of Twido modules that can be connected Compatibility Kbit/s Remote link 38.4 RS 485 Serial port or optional port only. from 1 to 7 With compact base controllers TWD LCAA //// and modular base controllers TWD LMDA ////
1/37
Presentation, combinations
Pre-wired solutions
Presentation
With its HE 10 connector products, the Twido range offers several solutions for economical, fast and reliable wiring. # TwidoFast pre-formed cables, in 3 or 5 m lengths, have one end fitted with an HE 10 type connector and the other with referenced, free wires, to facilitate the connection of inputs/outputs. # Telefast 2 pre-wired kits which, under a single reference, include a TeleFast 2 sub-base together with its cable (1 or 2 m length) for connection to the HE 10 connectors on Twido modules. These sub-bases allow easy wiring with their screw terminal blocks, as well as signal adaptation (Twido transistor outputs to relay outputs, 1 common per 4 channels). # Three types of cable, available in 3 lengths, which ensure compatibility with the entire Telefast 2 range, so allowing Twido controllers to be used in conjunction with Telefast 2 sub-bases (see table below).
Combinations of modular base controllers and I/O modules with HE 10 type connector
Combination possible Not applicable Twido modules Base controller 12 inputs 8 outputs TWD LMDA 20DTK/40DTK (6) Type of connection block 26-way HE10 TWD FCW 30M/50M TWD FCW 30K/50K Extension modules 16 inputs 16 outputs DDI 16DK/32DK (6) DDO 16TK/32TK (6) DDO 32UK/32DK 20-way HE10
ABF TP26MP/00
Input adapter sub-bases 16 channels ABE 7S16E2///7P16F3// (3) Output adapter sub-bases 8 channels ABE 7S08S2/// ABE 7R08S////7P08T330 (5) (1) (2) 16 channels ABE 7R16S////7R16T////7P16T/// (4) ABE 7S16S1/// (4) ABE 7S16S2/// Sub-bases for analogue/counting I/O ABE 7CPA01/7CPA02/7CPA03 ABE 7CPA21/7CPA31 (1) Using splitter sub-base ABE 7ACC02 which allows splitting of 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels (Twido/sub-base cable). (2) For sub-base ABE 7R08S216 with 8 bistable relays, all 16 output channels are used. (3) 12 input channels used out of 16 available. (4) 8 output channels used out of 12/16 available. (5) Except for sub-base ABE 7R08S216 with bistable relays which requires 16 output channels. (6) Module with two connectors, requiring use of two identical cables.
Connections
ABF TP26MP/00 26-way HE10 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
20-way HE10 B
20 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
26-way HE10 C
18 20 17 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20-way HE10 B
18 20 16 8 15 7 14 6 13 5 12 4 11 3 10 2 9 1
20-way HE10 B
18 20 19 17 16 8 15 7 14 6 13 5 12 4 11 3 10 2 9 1
Output side
Twido side
Input side
Twido side
Input side
Twido side
1/38
Output side
References
References
TwidoFast pre-formed cables
Description Pre-formed cables Gauge C.s.a. 1 pre-formed 22 cable: one end 0.035 mm2 fitted with HE 10 22 connector, one end 0.035 mm2 with free wires I/O extensions 22 TWD DDI 16DK/32DK 0.035 mm2 TWD DDO 16/K/32/K 22 0.035 mm2 26-way 20-way Gauge C.s.a. 22 0.035 mm2 22 0.035 mm2 1 relay sub-base Outputs 22 1 pre-formed cable TWD DDO 16TK/32TK 0.035 mm2 22 0.035 mm2 1 passive sub-base Modular base controllers 22 1 relay sub-base TWD LMDA 0.035 mm2 1 pre-formed cable 20DTK/40DTK 22 0.035 mm2 Description For use with Twido 1 passive sub-base Inputs 1 pre-formed cable TWD DDI 16DK/32DK Description Description For use with Twido Modular base controllers TWD LMDA 20DTK/40DTK Cable length 3m 5m 3m 5m Cable length 1m 2m 1m 2m 1m 2m Reference TWD FCW 30M TWD FCW 50M TWD FCW 30K TWD FCW 50K TWD FCN 5K26 TWD FCN 5K20 Reference TWD FST 16D10 TWD FST 16D20 TWD FST 16R10 TWD FST 16R20 TWD FST 20DR10 TWD FST 20DR20 Weight kg 0.405 0.670 0.405 0.670 Weight kg 0.330 0.410 0.440 0.520 0.570 0.650
16 outputs
12 inputs/8 outputs
1/39
Presentation
Presentation
TwidoSoft is a graphical development environment for creating, configuring and managing applications for Twido programmable controllers. TwidoSoft is a 32-bit Windows-based program which runs on a PC with Windows 98 (second edition), 2000 or XP operating system. TwidoSoft software is based on a standard interface which offers the user-friendly features of the Windows environment with which users are already familiar: windows, toolbars, pull-down menus, balloon tips, contextsensitive help, etc. For development work, TwidoSoft provides a comprehensive set of features to simplify programming and configuration: 5 Programming in instruction list or ladder language. These two languages are reversible. 5 Application browser with multiple window views, aiding easy software configuration. 5 Editors for main programming and configuration functions. 5 Cut, copy and paste functions. 5 Symbolic programming. 5 Cross-referencing. 5 Duplication of application programs. On site (on-line mode), TwidoSoft provides the following main functions: 5 Real-time animation of program and/or data elements. 5 Diagnostics on programmable controller operation. 5 Monitoring of the applications use of memory. 5 Downloading and uploading of controller programs. 5 Backup of controller programs to the optional EEPROM memory modules. Connecting a PC to a Twido controller # The PC is connected to the built-in serial port of the Twido controller by means of a TSX PCX 1031 multifunction cable or to a USB port using cable TSX PCX 3030 (Windows 2000 or XP only). It converts RS 232 output signals from the PC to RS 485 signals for the controller. Connection of a PC, via cable, to the built-in port of Twido base controllers automatically sets the communication protocol of this port to a protocol which is compatible with TwidoSoft. # It is also possible to connect the PC to the serial port of Twido base controllers via modems. The modems used must be defined, for TwidoSoft via the "Preferences" screen, and for the Twido controller, via the hardware configuration ("Connection management" screen). When the connection is established, TwidoSoft and the Twido controller will each initialise the modem assigned to them by sending a initialisation string of the Hayes protocol type.
1/40
Functions
User interface
TwidoSoft provides an intuitive, Windows-based user interface, including balloon tips and on-line help. The Twido user interface offers the following features: # Application browser: this browser is a window providing the directory structure of the application. The windows and toolbars can be moved and attached to the borders of the main window. The elements of an application appear in a logical hierarchy based on their structure within the application. They are arranged as an indented tree structure which can be expanded or collapsed. The application browser can be used to view, program and manage a Twido application and to configure hardware using a graphical representation of the base controllers, I/O extensions and options. # Status bar: this is a panel at the bottom of the main window which displays information about the application, the controller status and the TwidoSoft software mode. This bar includes a "a memory usage indicator", indicating the percentage of total memory used by the program. A warning message is displayed when available memory is getting low. # Operating modes: TwidoSoft software can operate in on-line mode (PC connected to the Twido base controller) and off-line mode (PC disconnected from the Twido base controller). Off-line mode is used to develop an application in the design office. This application must then be transferred from the PC memory to the controller memory (downloaded) in order to be able to run on the controller. On-line mode is used to debug and adjust this application. In this mode, the application program in the PC memory is identical to the application in the controller memory. Program changes can therefore be made directly to the application in the Twido controller. Editors and viewers TwidoSoft provides special windows, called editors, for performing the main tasks necessary to develop an application. A TwidoSoft application consists of a program, configuration data, symbols allocated to the variables and documentation. These components can be used in any order when creating an application. Developing each part of an application using separate editors makes it possible to rationalise the development process. TwidoSoft software provides: # Instruction List language and Ladder language editors. # A configuration editor. # Variables editors (with symbols) and animation table editors. # Ladder language, cross reference and program error viewers. TwidoSoft software also provides security features to protect the integrity of programs. "Application protection" right of access prevents access to the controller application. This option prohibits unauthorised transfers of an application. Password protection is selected when an application is transferred to the controller to make access to the application secure. Configuration of hardware and software Configuring Twido programmable controllers consists of selecting options for the controllers hardware and software resources. These resources can be adapted at any time while creating a program: # Hardware resources allow the user to define the type and number of Twido components in a configuration: base controller, remote controllers, I/O expansion modules and optional modules. # Software resources consist of configurable and non configurable functions. Function blocks (also called variables) are blocks created in memory to execute automation functions which will be used by the program. For example, when configuring a counter function block, memory addresses in the controller are assigned to represent the values associated with the parameters of this counter (current values, preset values). Other software resources are called internal memory blocks, such as bits, words, constant words, system words, network exchange words. These resources are configured using TwidoSoft software.
1/41
Functions (continued)
Programming
TwidoSoft allows the user to write a controller program in either Ladder language or instruction List language. The language selected depends on user preference and does not affect the application: # Ladder language consists of a series of ladder rungs, represented graphically, together with text comments. # Instruction List language consists of a series of text-based instructions. In either language, the program is "written" in the logical order required to control the machine or process. It is recommended that the programs be "documented" by adding comments (explanatory text inserted at program instruction level). These two languages are reversible, provided that a few basic rules are followed: Ladder programming A program written in Ladder language consists of networks of linked graphical elements (similar to electromagnetic contact diagrams), organised into rungs which are executed sequentially by the controller when it is in RUN mode. Each rung comprises graphical elements (contacts, coils) linked by horizontal and vertical "lines", organised into a programming grid starting with a potential bar on the left and ending with a second potential bar on the right. The graphical elements are associated with: # Controller inputs and outputs, such as sensors, pushbuttons and relays. # Arithmetic, logic and numeric value comparison operations. # Automation function blocks, such as timers, counters, drum controllers, registers, etc. # Controller internal variables, such as internal bits and words. Instruction List programming A program written in instruction List language consists of a series of instructions executed sequentially by the controller. Each instruction is represented by a single program line and consists of three components: # Line number - line numbers are generated automatically when the instructions are entered. # Instruction code - the instruction code is a symbol linked to an operand identifying the operation to be performed on this operand. These operations are generally of the Boolean and numerical type. # Operand - an operand is a reference, a symbol or a number representing a piece of physical data. For example, in the program opposite, the operand %I0.4 is the reference corresponding to a controller discrete input. Programmable controller variables An instruction can include from zero to three operands, depending on the type of instruction code. The operands may be: # Sensor image inputs (detectors, control buttons, etc.) # Preactuator output images (contactors, solenoid valves, pilot lights, etc.) # Internal bits (equivalent to the internal relays in electromagnetic control equipment) # Control equipment function blocks (timers, counters, drum controllers, registers). # ...
1/42
Functions (continued)
Integrated functions
PID For all controller versions 4 2.0: # 14 PID programming loops. # "Autotuning" algorithm 1. # Analogue / PWM output. # Linear conversion of measuring input. # 2 alarm levels (high and low) on the "measurement". # Command output limits, # Direct and inverse action. # 2 animated modes for TwidoSoft PID: 5 configuration mode, 5 debugging mode. Event processing For all controller versions 4 2.0: # Event management by the application. # 2 priority levels. # 3 types of source: 5 4 event sources based on the basic inputs, 5 4 event sources based on the very fast threshold counter (VFcounter), 5 1 event source based on the periodic event (Timer). # Command masked and enabled by the system bits. # Each event executes a single user logic subroutine. # Updating of "reflex" outputs.
Software set-up
For all controller versions 4 2.0: Configuration of the AS-Interface bus is carried out via TwidoSoft software, version 2.0 or greater. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity: # Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (management transparent to the user). # Topological addressing of I/O: any AS-Interface slave defined on the bus has a topological address assigned to it on the bus, in a way that is transparent to the user. # Each AS-Interface module sensor/actuator is seen by Twido in the same way as any I/O. Configuration of the AS-Interface bus Configuration of all the modules present on the AS-Interface bus is carried out by following the on-screen instructions: Definition of the AS-Interface bus master module Module TWD NOI 10M3 is defined like any I/O module. Configuration of AS-Interface slave modules From the definition screen, it is possible to configure all the slave modules corresponding to all the I/O of the interfaces present on the AS-Interface bus. The user selects the reference of the AS-Interface module shown in the Schneider Electric catalogue, among the various discrete, analogue or safety modules. This selection automatically determines the AS-Interface profile and parameters associated with each interface module. Programming After configuration, the I/O connected to the AS-Interface bus are processed by the application program in the same way as any of the PLCs "In-rack" I/O, either by their address (e.g. %I\4.0\16.2, input 2 of slave 16 on the AS-Interface bus), or by their associated symbol (e.g. Start_conveyor).
Functions (continued)
The counter function allows the controller to count a large number of pulses, within one program scan cycle. Using its integrated 16-bit fast counters, Twido can count up to 65 535 pulses generated by $ 24 V sensors. It can compare the current counter value with a preset value and trigger an output when the preset value is reached. This type of counter function can be used for counting parts or events, or for measuring length or position . The number of integrated fast-counters depends on the type of base controller:
Base controller type TWD Counter VFC (20 kHz) Counter FC (5 kHz) Compact LCAA 10/12/24 DRF 1 3 Modular LMDA 20D/K 2 2
Very fast counter - VFC (20 kHz) The 20 kHz VFC (Very Fast Counter) is an up/down counter with possibility of auxiliary inputs. The counter is accessed by means of a function block (%VFCi) programmed using TwidoSoft. The %VFCi function block can be used to execute one of the following 5 functions, all with a maximum frequency of 20 kHz: # Up/Down counter # Up/Down counter with detection of running direction. # Single Up counter. # Single Down counter. # Frequency meter. The pulses to be counted may come from an incremental encoder or from 2 proximity sensors (up/down counting) connected to inputs I0 and I1 of Twido base controllers. Fast counter - FC (5 kHz) The fast counter is available for up or down counting of pulses (rising edges) on the discrete inputs of Twido base controllers, at a maximum frequency of 5 kHz. The Up and Down counters are accessed by means of a function block (%VFCi) programmed using TwidoSoft. Using the configuration editor, the user must select either Up or Down counting mode for each function block, define the initial value of the preset %FCi.P (1...65 535) and select the attribute "adjustable" in order to be able to dynamically change the preset value %FCi.P and the current value %FCi.V. Within function block %FCi, the current value %FCi.V varies by: # Incrementing the value 0 to the preset value %FCi.P in counter mode. # Decrementing the preset value %FCi.P to 0 in down counter mode.
Positioning
Twido modular controllers include two positioning functions (frequency 7 kHz) which can be used, for example, for controlling step motors: # Function PLS (pulse) - pulse generator output # Function PWM - pulse width modulation output. This function can also be used for applications with light or sound intensity control (controller function). PLS function (pulse, 7kHz) The PLS function block generates pulses of fixed ratio. In some cases, the frequency can be fixed and in others it is variable (as in control of slopes when driving step motors). The %PLS function block can be programmed to generate a specific number of pulses. %PLS function blocks are assigned to outputs %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1 on modular base controllers. The pulse generator signal has a variable period, but with a constant duty cycle which establishes an ON to OFF ratio of 50 % of the period (see illustration opposite). PWM function (7 kHz) The PWM function block generates pulses of fixed frequency, with a variable ratio between the high state and low state of the output signal. The ON to OFF duration ratio is a dynamic variable called %PWM.R, with a range from 0 % to 100 %. PWM function blocks are assigned to outputs %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1 on a base controller. The PWM function can be used to control analogue module outputs. The user-defined %PWM function block generates a signal on output %Q0.0.0 or %Q0.0.1 of modular base controllers (see illustration opposite).
1/44
Characteristics
Characteristics
Instructions
Combinational List instructions # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # LD, LDN, LDR, LDF : read the state of a bit, (direct, inverse, rising and falling edges) ST, STN, S, R : write an output (direct, inverse, set, reset) AND, ANDN, ANDR, ANDF : logic AND with a bit (direct, inverse, rising and falling edges) OR, ORN, ORR, ORF : logic OR with a bit (direct, inverse, rising and falling edges) LD (, AND (, OR(,) : open and close brackets (8 possible levels) XOR, XORN, XORR, XORF : exclusive OR with a bit MPS, MRD, MPP : buffer memory management for divergence towards output bits N : negation -*-i : step (1 i 62) =*=i : initial step (1 i 62) #i : activate step i, after deactivation of current step # : deactivate current step #Di : deactivate step i after another step =*=POST : start post-processing %Xi : bit associated with step i MCS, MCR : master relay END, ENDC, ENDCN : end of program (conditional or unconditional) JMP, JMPC, JMPCN : jump to a label % L (conditional or unconditional) SRn : call subroutine n (0 n 15) RET : end of subroutine NOP : non-operative instruction
Instructions on program
# Title : 122 characters before each LD, LDN, LDR, LDF instruction # Comments : 4 lines of 122 characters before each LD, LDN, LDR, LDF instruction # Possibility of associating a comment of 122 characters with each instruction # 10 contacts of 7 lines with 1 output per line # Title : 122 characters per rung # Comments : 4 lines of 122 characters # Normally open, normally closed and on edge contacts # Direct, inverse, SET and RESET coils # Program jump, subroutine call # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # Timers : %TMi (0 i 31) 0 to 9999 (word) Up/Down counters : %Ci (0 i 15) 0 to 9999 (word) 4 16-bit LIFO or FIFO registers : %Ri (0 i 3) 4 Drum controllers : %DRi (0 i 3) 8 steps Real-time clock : %RTCi (0 i 15) month, day, hour, minute. Transmission/reception of message of 64 words maximum (internal or constant) : EXCH Exchange control : %MSG available output, fault output 8 shift bit registers : %SBRi (0 i 7), shift one step to the left or right (max. 16 steps) 8 step counter blocks : %SCi (0 i 7), move forward or back one step (max. 256 steps) Fast counter (5 kHz ), Up/Down counter : )& Very fast counter 20 kHz, Up/Down counter, frequency meter 9)& Pulse width modulated output : %PWM with modular base controller Pulse generator output : %PLS with modular base controller Assignment in word, indexed word, word table bit strings : := Arithmetic : +, -, x, /, REM, SQRT Logic : AND, OR, XOR, NOT, INC, DEC Shift operation : SHL, SHR, ROL, ROR (logic and rotate) Conversion : BTI, ITB (BCD <-> Binary) Comparison: >, <, <=, >=, =, <> 1 input for controller RUN/STOP command 1 Security output : controller "block" error Real time display of Grafcet steps used Symbol table management +, -, *, / SQRT ABS TRUNC LOG LN EXP EXPT
Ladder rungs
Numerical instructions
Specific functions
(1) When the numbers of objects are not indicated, see characteristics pages 1/6 and 1/12
1/45
Characteristics (continued)
Characteristics (continued)
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
COS SIN TAN ACOS ASIN ATAN DEG_TO_RAD RAD_TO_DEG +, -, *, / SQRT ABS REM INC DEC SHL SHR ROL ROR SUM_ARR EQUAL_ARR FIND_EQR_FIND_GTR, FIND_LTR MAX_ARR, MIN_ARR OCCUR_ARR SORT_ARR ROR_ARR, ROL_ARR LENGTH_ARR L_KUP MEAN ITB, BTI DINT_TO_REAL, REAL_TO_DINT
Other functions
Addressable objects
Bit objects (1) # # # # # # # # # # # % I/Qx.y : I/O bits % Mi : internal bits % Si : 128 system bits %Xi : 62 Grafcet steps % //i.j : function block bits % //i:Xk : bits extracted from internal words, system words, constant words, input and output words % MWi : internal words % KWi: 64 constant words % SWi : 128 system words % INWi.j : 4 input words per controller (exchange words for inter-controller communication) % QNWi.j : 4 output words per controller (exchange words for inter-controller communication)
# %/i:L : bit strings (I/O, internal, system and Grafcet bits) # %/Wi:L : word tables (internal, constant and system words) (1) When the numbers of objects are not indicated, see characteristics pages 1/6 and 1/12
1/46
References
References
The multi-language software packages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish) are for use on PCs (1) with Windows 98 SE , Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating system. These software packages include: # A CD-ROM containing TwidoSoft multi-language software and multi-language documentation for hardware and software set-up. # Depending on the model, a PC/Twido controller connection cable, reference TSX PCX 1031 which is compatible with Twido, Micro and Premium programmable controllers (length 2.5 m). TwidoSoft software packages
Reversible languages TwidoSoft Ladder multi-language Instruction List packs Description PC connection cable TSX PCX 1031 Reference Weight (1) kg TWD SPU 1001 V10M
Without
Separate components
Description Connecting cables Application From All Twido controllers Reference To USB port on the PC (2) TSX PCX 3030 with TwidoSoft software installed Serial port on the PC TSX PCX 1031 with TwidoSoft software installed Weight kg
TwidoPack kits Schneider Electric offers two TwidoPack kits to help you discover and become familiar with the new range of Twido programmable controllers. TwidoPack, which is inexpensive and easy to use, is available in two versions, each comprising: # A Twido base controller. # A set of options. # A TwidoSoft software package (with cable) TWD SPU 1001 V10M. # A teach-yourself E-Learning CD-Rom.
Description TwidoPack Compact Twido base controller Compact 10 I/O TWD LCAA 10DRF " 100240 V, relay outputs Options Real-time clock cartridge TWD XCP RTC 6-input simulator TWD XSM 6 Reference (3) TWD XDP PAK1/ Weight kg
TwidoPack Modular
Real-time clock TWD XDP PAK2/ cartridge TWD XCP RTC Built-in display module TWD XCP ODM Serial interface adapter TWD NAC 485T Pre-formed cable (3 m) TWD FCW 30M
User documentation
Description Twido installation and set-up manuals Hardware and software Format Hard copy (216 x 181 mm) Language English French German Spanish Italian Reference TWD USE 10AE TWD USE 10AF TWD USE 10AD TWD USE 10AS TWD USE 10AI Weight kg
(1) Typical recommended configuration: 300 MHz processor, 128 Mb of RAM with 40 Mb of available hard disk space. (2) PC running under Windows 2000 or XP operating system only. (3) Replace the / at the end of the reference with E: English, F: French.
1/47
2/0
Contents
Selection guide for control relays and plug-in control relays # Universal relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5 # Miniature relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8 # Interface relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/11
2/1
Selection guide
Applications
Control voltages
" $
12690 V 12440 V
12690 V 12250 V
24400 V 1272 V
Functions Instantaneous relays On-delay or Off-delay relays Latching relays Pulse on energisation relays Flashing relays / Function performed Features / / / / / /
Low consumption version for $ Linked contacts (in accordance with INRS and BIA specifications)
Number of contacts On basic device 5 N/O or 3 N/O + 2 N/C combined double break 4 N/C or N/O combined double break 2 N/C or N/O combined double break 2 N/C or N/O combined double break
Up to 4 N/C or N/O contacts combined 4 N/C or N/O combined double break double break 10 A
Operational voltage Durability (operating cycles) 1 A/230 V, AC-15 1 A/24 V, DC-13 Device type Pages
Up to 690 V
Up to 660 V
Up to 690 V
30 million 30 million
2 million 6 million
10 million 10 million
CAD
CA/-K
CA/-SK
2/2
Equipment based on plug-in control relays Plug-in control relays Universal type plug-in control relays Miniature plug-in control relays Interface relays
12240 V 5240 V
24230 V (other voltages available on request) 12, 24, 48 or 110 V (other voltages available on request)
/ / / / /
/ / / /
Low consumption as standard for $ Version with low level contacts (gold flashed contacts) 4 C/O (Off-delay, On-delay)
Manual override of contact operation possible, by means of actuator Version with LED to indicate relay status
Other functions and connections available on request 2 or 3 C/O (Off-delay, On-delay) 2 or 4 C/O (Offdelay, On-delay) 2, 3 or 4 C/O (Off- 1 or 2 C/O (Off-delay, On-delay) delay, On-delay)
5A
5 A (RXN-21)
Up to 250 V
400 000
500 000
100 000
100 000
100 000
RH
RU
RXN
2/8
RXL
RSB
2/11
2/3
Characteristics
Relay type
RUN 21C 2 C/O AgNi A 10 36 000 3600 V 20 V "/$ 250 mA 50 VA 3000 " $ " V V VA
RUN 33A 3 C/O linked Hard silver 10 gold-flashed 4 36 000 3600 10 " 250, $ 125 1 1000
Contact characteristics
Number and type of contacts Contact materials Rated thermal current (Ith) Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/h Switching voltage Breaking capacity For temperature 6 40 C No-load Under load Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Coil characteristics
Rated voltage (Un) Average consumption Permissible voltage variation Drop-out voltage threshold Inrush Sealed 24, 48, 110, 230, 50/60 Hz (other voltages available on request) 12, 24, 48, 110 (other voltages available on request) 3.5 " 2.3 VA, $ 1.5 W 0.81.1 Un (50 Hz or $), 0.851.1 Un (60 Hz) " 0.15 Un, $ 0.05 Un
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications (pending) Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance Degree of protection Shock resistance Mechanical durability Operating time (response time) Standard version Standard version Storage C Operation C Conforming to IEC EN 68-2-6 EN 61810-1 UL, CSA - 40+ 70 " - 20+ 40, $ - 20+ 60 4 gn (30100 Hz) IP 40 10 gn In millions of operating cycles 20 Between coil energisation " ms About 15 and making of the ms About 15 $ On-delay contact ms About 15 Between coil de" energisation and making $ ms About 15 of the Off-delay contact Resistive load 0.1 to 10 A Inductive load See curves below V V V V 250 C 250, B 380 2500 2500 1000 Switching capacity on a $ supply for minimum durability of : 106 operating cycles (resistive or inductive load with diode RVW 040BD)
6 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,6 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0 20 60 100 140 200
Insulation characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation class Dielectric strength (rms voltage) Durability in N (230 V, 50 Hz)
10 7
Durability (number of operating cycles)
Conforming to IEC 947 Conforming to VDE 0110 Between coil and contact " Between poles Between contacts "
Socket type
RUZ 1A 10 C 250 IP 20 CSA, UR 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 Mixed RUN 31A RUN 33A
RUZ 1D
RUZ 1C
RUZ 7A
RUZ 7D
Socket characteristics
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A Insulation class Degree of protection Product certifications Connection Solid cable without cable end Flexible cable with or w/o cable end Arrangement of coil/contact terminals Type of protection module Relay types used
RUN 21D
RUN 21D
2/4
References
560592
Without Green
10
Without Green
Octal 8 flat pins Octal 8 flat pins Undecal 11 flat pins Undecal 11 flat pins
Without module RUN 21 octal (indicator, RUN 31 and RUN 33 protection or undecal timer) RUN 21C and RUN 31C RUN 31A and With module RUN 33 (indicator, protection or RUN 21 octal timer)
560594
Accessories
Description Sold in Unit reference lots of Weight kg Maintaining clamp for octal/undecal 25 RUZ 200 0.001 Maintaining clamp for flat pin 25 RUZ 210 0.001 (1) Standard control circuit voltage. For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Volts 12 24 48 110 230 $ RUN 21 and RUN 31 JD BD ED FD RUN 33 BD ED " 50/60 Hz RUN 21, RUN 31 B7 E7 F7 P7 and RUN 33 (2) Modules for use with sockets RUZ 7A or RUZ 7D.
560590
Coil characteristics
Control circuit voltage Uc RUZ 200 V 12 24 48 110 230 d.c. supply Average resistance at 20 C 10% 96 384 1336 7660 Cod. Operating voltage limits Min. Max. V 9.6 19.2 38.4 88 V 19.2 26.4 52.8 121 a.c. supply 50/60 Hz Average Cod. Operating resistance voltage limits at 20 C Min. Max. 15 % V V 73.7 B7 204 26.4 305 E7 408 54.8 1710 F7 93.5 121 7500 P7 196 253
JD BD ED FD
2/5
Characteristics
Relay type
RXL 4G06B///
Contact characteristics
Number and type of contacts Contact materials Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/h Switching voltage Breaking capacity AgNi/AU 5 6 For temperature 6 40 C No-load Under load Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum " $ " $ " $ A
5 2500
5 1500
2 1500
Coil characteristics
Rated voltage (Un) Average consumption Permissible voltage variation Drop-out voltage threshold 24230, 50/60 Hz 12110 1.6 0.9 0.81.1 Un (50/60 Hz or $) 0.15 Un 0.1 Un
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications (pending) Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance Degree of protection Shock resistance Mechanical durability Operating time (response time) IEC 61810-1 UL, CSA C - 40+ 85 C $ - 40+ 70, " - 40...+ 55 > 5 gn (10150 Hz) IP 40 10 gn (closing), 5 gn (opening) 20 In millions of operating cycles Between coil energisation " ms About 12 and making of the $ ms About 12 On-delay contact Between coil de" ms About 12 energisation and making $ ms About 4 of the Off-delay contact 12 A - 250 V : 0.1 10 A - 250 V : 0.1 Resistive load See curves below Inductive load Standard version Standard version Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 68-2-6
20
6 A - 250 V : 0.1
Insulation characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation class Dielectric strength (rms voltage) Electrical durability of contacts Resistive load "
Number of operating cycles
Conforming to IEC 947 Conforming to VDE 0110 Between coil and contact " Between poles Between contacts "
250 C 250 V 2500 V 2500 V 1500 Reduction coefficient for inductive load (depending on power factor cos )
Reduction coefficient
107
1 0,8 0,6
12 10 5 4 3 2
C
106
C
1 0,4 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
D A B
0 20 30 80 120 160 200 250 300 Voltage $
A
105 0 1
B
2 3 Switching capacity 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,3 0,2 Cos
0,1
A RXL 3 (T = 0 ms) B RXL 3 (T = 40 ms) C RXL 4 D RXL 2 Durability (inductive load) = durability (resistive load) x reduction coefficient
2/6
Characteristics (continued)
Relay type
RXN 21E1/// 2 C/O AgNi A 5 18 000 1200 V Minimum: 5, maximum: 250 " , 250 $ mA 10 VA 1250 V $ 12110, " 24230, 50/60 Hz $ 0.9 W, " 1.6 VA 0.81.1 Un (50/60 Hz or $) $ 0.1 Un, " 0.15 Un
Contact characteristics
Number and type of contacts Contact materials Rated thermal current (Ith) Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/h Switching voltage Breaking capacity For temperature 6 40 C No-load Under load Minimum Minimum Maximum
Coil characteristics
Rated voltage (Un) Average consumption Permissible voltage variation Drop-out voltage threshold
Environment
Conforming to standards Approvals (pending) Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance Degree of protection Shock resistance Mechanical durability Operating time (response time) Standard version Standard version Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 IEC 61810-1 CSA, UL C - 40+ 70 C - 20+ 50 > 5 gn (30150 Hz) IP 40 20 gn In millions of operating cycles 20 Between coil energisation " ms About 12 and making of the ms About 12 $ On-delay contact ms About 12 Between coil de" energisation and making $ ms About 4 of the Off-delay contact Resistive load 5 A / 250 V : 0.1 Inductive load See curves below V 250 A 250 V 2000 V 2000 V 1500 Reduction coefficient for inductive load (depending on power factor cos )
Reduction coefficient
Insulation characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation class Dielectric strength (rms voltage) Electrical durability of contacts Resistive load "
107
Durability (number of operating cycles)
Conforming to IEC 947 Conforming to VDE 0110 Between coil and contact " Between poles Between contacts "
1 0,8 0,6
106
0,4
0 20 40 60 80
Socket type
Durability (inductive load) = durability (resistive load) x reduction coefficient RXZ E1S108M E1S111M E1S114M E1M114M E1M114 12 C 250 IP 20 CSA, UR 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 Separate RZM type E RXL 2 RXL 3 RXN 21 (1) Limited to 7 A in operation. Schemes : page 2/12 12 7
7G 6
Socket characteristics
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A Insulation class Degree of protection Product certifications Connection Solid cable without cable end Flexible cable with or w/o cable end Arrangement of coil/contact terminals Type of protection module Relay types used
2 x 2.5 mm2
2/7
References
560586
References
Relays for standard applications (1)
Number of C/O contacts Conventional rated thermal current LED Sold in lots of Unit reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) RXN 21E12// RXN 21E11// RXL 2A12B2// RXL 2A12B1// RXL 3A10B2// RXL 3A10B1// RXN 41G12// RXN 41G11// RXL 4A06B2// RXL 4A06B1// Weight
A 5 12
10 5 6
Red Without Green Without Green Without Red Without Green Without
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
kg 0.035 0.034 0.036 0.035 0.036 0.035 0.035 0.034 0.036 0.035
108780-26-s
Diode
RXW 040MD
560588
(2) Standard control circuit voltages Volts 12 24 48 $ JD BD ED " (50/60 Hz) RXN B7 E7 RXL B7 E7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
110 FD F7
120 F7
230 P7 P7
Coil characteristics
Control circuit voltage Uc d.c. supply Average Cod. Operating voltage resistance limits at 20 C Min. Max. 10% V V a.c. supply 50/60 Hz Average Cod. Operating voltage resistance limits at 20 C Min. Max. 15 % V V
RXL 3A10B2BD + RZM 031RB + RXZ P10 + RXZ E1S111M Characteristics : pages 2/6 and 2/7 Dimensions : page 2/14
V RXN relays 12 160 JD 9.6 13.2 24 640 BD 19.2 26.4 150 B7 19.2 26.4 48 2600 ED 38.4 52.8 635 E7 38.4 52.8 110 13 600 FD 88 121 F7 230 15 400 P7 184 253 RXL relays 12 160 JD 9.6 13.2 24 640 BD 19.2 26.4 158 B7 19.2 26.4 48 2600 ED 38.4 52.8 640 E7 38.4 52.8 110 13 600 FD 88 121 120 3770 F7 96 132 230 16 100 P7 184 253 (1) These relays have a lockable Test button on their front face, which can be converted to nonlockable or can be eliminated; see accessories on page opposite.
2/8
References (continued)
Sockets (1)
560590
Application
RXN 21, RXN 41, RXL 2A12 and RXL 4 RXN 21, RXN 41 L
Sold in lots of 10
Weight kg 0.048
Mixed
10
RXZ 7G
0.055
Separate
10
RXZ E1S108M
0.058
RXL 3A10
Separate
10
RXZ E1S111M
0.065
560591
RXN 4, RXL 4
Separate
10
RXZ E1S114M
0.070
E (2)
Mixed
10
RXZ E1M114M
0.070
Accessories
Description Button Application For non-lockable Test function Sold in lots of 20 (3) Unit reference RXZ P20 Weight kg 0.001
RXZ R235
20 (3)
RXZ P10
0.001
10
RXZ 200
0.001
RXZ E
10
RXZ R235
0.005
10
RXZ 300
0.010
Clip-in fixing on socket RXZ-7 in place of module RXW 040MD Clip-in fixing on socket RXZ-E
10
RXZ 310
0.011
10
RXZ L320
0.001
(1) A bag containing ten RXZ 300 legends is supplied with sockets RXZ 7G. RXZ E1M114 : 7 A, " 300 V. RXZ 7G : 6 A, " 300 V. RXZ E1S///M : 12 A, " 300 V. (2) Each socket RXZ E1M114M is delivered with a legend RXZ L320. (3) 10 red and 10 green.
2/9
Characteristics
Relay type
RSB 2A080// 2 C/O AgNi 8 72 000 600 5 " 400, $ 300 5 2000
Contact characteristics
Number and type of contacts Contact materials Rated thermal current (Ith) Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/h Switching voltage For temperature 6 40 C No-load Under load Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum A
Breaking capacity
V V mA VA V
3000
4000
Coil characteristics
Rated voltage (Un) Average consumption Permissible voltage variation Drop-out voltage threshold $ 6110, " 24240, 50/60 Hz $ 0.45 W, " 0.75 VA 0.81.1 Un (50/60 Hz or $) at 20 C $ 0.1 Un, " 0.15 Un IEC 61810-1 UL, CSA - 40+ 85 $ - 40+ 85, " - 40...+ 70 > 10 gn (10150 Hz) IP 40 10 gn (closing), 5 gn (opening) 30 About 12 About 9 About 10 About 4 8 A - 250 V : 0.1 See curves below V 12 A - 250 V : 0.1 16 A - 250 V : 0.07
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications (pending) Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance Degree of protection Shock resistance Mechanical durability Operating time (response time) Standard version Standard version Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C
In millions of operating cycles Between coil " energisation and making $ of the On-delay contact Between coil de" energisation and making $ of the Off-delay contact Resistive load Inductive load Conforming to IEC 947 Conforming to VDE 0110 Between coil and contact " Between poles Between contacts "
ms ms ms ms
Insulation characteristics
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation class Dielectric strength (rms voltage) Electrical durability of contacts Resistive load "
Durability (Number of operating cycles)
400 C 250 V 5000 V 2500 V 1000 Reduction coefficient for inductive load " (depending on power factor cos )
Reduction coefficient (A)
107
50 16 12 8 5 2 1 0,5
A
106
B C A
C
105
0,4
Durability (inductive load) = durability (resistive load) x reduction coefficient. RSZ E1S48M RSB E1S35M 12 C 250 IP 20 CSA, UR 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 Separate RZM type E RSB 2A080 and RSB 1A160 (contacts to RSB 1A120 be wired in parallel)
Socket characteristics
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) A Insulation class Degree of protection Product certifications Connection Solid cable without cable end Flexible cable with or w/o cable end Arrangement of coil/contact terminals Type of protection module Relay types used
2/10
References
560582
2 1
A 8 12 16
10 10 10
Protection modules
Description Type Voltage V $ 6230 $ 624 $ 2460 $ 110230 $ or " 624 $ or " 2460 $ or " 110230 " 2460 " 110240 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Unit reference Weight kg 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.010 0.010
2
RZM 040W RZM 031RB RZM 031BN RZM 031FPD RZM 021RB RZM 021BN RZM 021FP RZM 041BN7 RZM 041FU7
E E
Varistor + LED E
RC circuit
Accessories
Application Maintaining clamp Legend Sold in lots of 10 10 Unit reference RSZ R215 RSZ L300 Weight kg 0.002 0.001
(1) Standard control circuit voltages Volts 6 12 24 48 60 110 120 220 230 240 $ RD JD BD ED ND FD " 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) To order a relay complete with socket (sold in lots of 20): add suffix S to the references selected above. Example: RSB 2A080// becomes RSB 2A080//S
560584
Coil characteristics
Control circuit voltage Uc V 6 12 24 48 60 110 120 220 230 240 d.c. supply Average resistance at 20 10% 90 360 1440 5700 7500 25 200 Cod. Operating voltage limits Min. Max. V 4.2 8.4 16.8 33.6 42 77 V 15.3 30.6 61.2 122.4 153 280 a.c. supply 50/60 Hz Average Cod. Operating voltage resistance limits at 20 C Min. Max. 15 % V V 400 B7 19.2 26.4 1550 E7 38.4 57.6 10 200 F7 96 144 35 500 M7 176 264 38 500 P7 184 276 42 500 U7 192 288
RD JD BD ED ND FD
RSZ R215
2/11
Schemes
8 24 7 21 6 22 1 A1
5 14 4 11 3 23 2 A2
5 14
4 11
8 24 7 21 6 22
5 14 4 11 3 12
2 A2
1 12 5 14 9 11 13 A1 2 22 6 24 10 21
3 12
1 A1
2 A2
When using relay RSB 1A160// with socket RSZ E1S48M : terminals 11 and 21, 14 and 24, 12 and 22 must be linked.
RXN 41G
1 12 5 14 9 11 13 A1 2 22 6 24 10 21 3 32 7 34 11 31 4 42 8 44 12 41 14 A2
RXL 2//
1 12 5 14 9 11 13 A1 4 42 8 44 12 41 14 A2
RXL 3//
1 12 4 14 7 11 13 A1 2 22 5 24 8 21 3 32 6 34 9 31 14 A2
1 A1
RXL 4//
3 32 7 34 11 31 4 42 8 44 12 41 14 A2
A2
11
21
A2
RUN 21D2///
12 4 14 22 5 24
12
14 3 A1 2 1 11 8 21 7 A2 A1 2 10 1 11 11 31
11
9 34
A2
RUN 21C2///
1 12 4 14 7 11 A (+) A1 3 22 6 24 9 21 B ( ) A2
RUN 31C2///
1 12 4 14 7 11 A (+) A1 2 32 5 34 8 31 3 22 6 24 9 21 B ( ) A2
(1) Blue references are those marked on the relay . References : pages 2/5, 2/8 and 2/11 Dimensions: page 2/14
2/12
Installation
Function selection Selection Function On-delay timer E Control Series control Function diagram
U
Control scheme
U
A1
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2 t
Series control
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2 t t
Series control
U U
Off-delay timer R
U S
U S
t
Contact .1/.4
A1
.1/.2
A2
Series control
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2
U S
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2
On-delay timer Es
U S
Contact .1/.4
.1/.2
A2
U S
B1
2/13
Dimensions
12,5 7,5
12,5 7,5
15,7 3,9
29 15
2,5
15,7 3,9
29 16,5
2,5
5
RSZ E1S35M
3,5
3,5
67 61
67
(4)
61
(4)
(1)
78,5
78,5
(1)
29,4
(3)
(2)
34,5 50
(3)
(2)
34,5 50
15,5
35,6 41,8
Sockets (references: page 2/9) RXZ E1M114
21,1
27,5
RXZ 7G
29,4 15,5
RXZ E1S108M
82
(4)
61
50
(4)
19
73,5
78,5
66
(2)
=
(2)
29 51
RXZ E1S111M
(3)
(2)
29 55 22,5 27
24,5 29,5
37,4 41,5
RXZ E1S114M
22 27
RXZ E1M114M
82 61
(4)
82 61
(4)
80 42,5
75
(1)
(4)
3,2 83
3,2
75
75
83
(1)
(1)
(3)
(2)
29 55 22,5 27
(3)
(2)
29 55 22,5 27
(3) (2)
24 27 53 22,5 27
(1) Relays, (2) Add-on protection module, (3) Maintaining clamp, (4) Legend. References: pages 28042/4, 28042/5 and 2/ 11 Schemes: page 2/12
2/14
75
(1)
3,2 82
3,2 83
Dimensions (continued)
37
24
55
35,5
59 66,5
35,5
RUZ 1A
2x 3,2 70
37,5
2x 3,2
65
22 27
RUZ 7A
30 38
32,5
22 26
RUZ 7D
30 38
3,5
2x 3,2 75
3,5
2x 3,2
75
22,5 26
RUZ 1C
30 38
22,5 26
30 38
2x 4
72
23 26
38 44
37
2/15
3/0
Contents
Selection guide for Zelio Time - timing relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 # Modular relays, solid state output, width 17.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 # Industrial relays, solid state output, width 22.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/10 # Modular relays, relay output, width 17.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14 # Industrial single or multifunction relays 5 1 relay output, width 22.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/18 5 2 relay outputs, width 22.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22 # Industrial single-function relays, relay output, width 22.5 mm . . . . . . . . page 3/26 # Industrial single or multifunction relays, relay output, width 22.5 mm . . page 3/28 # Industrial, single-function relays, optimum, relay output, width 22.5 mm, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34 # Universal plug-in relays, 8-pin, relay output, width 35 mm . . . . . . . . . . page 3/40 # Universal plug-in relays, 11-pin, relay output, width 35 mm . . . . . . . . . page 3/44 # Miniature plug-in relays, relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/47 # Panel-mounted, plug-in, universal relays 5 1 relay output, 7 timing ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/51 5 1 or 2 relays outputs, 11 timing ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55 5 1 relay output, 11 timing ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/57
3/1
Selection guide
Applications
These timing relays enable simple automation cycles to be set up using wired logic. They can also be used to complement the functions of PLCs. Solid state Timing relays with solid state output reduce the amount of wiring required (wired in series). The durability of these timing relays is independent of the number of operating cycles. Relay Relay outputs provide complete isolation between the supply and outut circuits. It is possible to have several output circuits.
Output
3
Type Modular Industrial Modular Industrial
Timing ranges
7 ranges : 1 or 2 ranges, 7 ranges : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, depending on model : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 10 s, 30 s, 300 s, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 60 min
Depending on model : 4 ranges : 0.6 s, 2.5 s, 20 s, 160 s 7 ranges : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 7 ranges : 1 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 100 s, 300 s, 10 min 10 ranges : 1 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 100 s, 300 s, 30 min, 300 min, 30 h, 300 h
Relay type
Pages
3/10
3/2
These timing relays enable simple automation cycles to be set up using wired logic. They can also be used to complement the functions of PLCs. Relay Relay outputs provide complete isolation between the supply and output circuits. It is possible to have several output circuits.
3
Optimum Plug-in Universal 1 range, depending on model : 0.5 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 300 s, 30 min 7 ranges : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h Miniature Panel-mounted Analogue Digital Depending on model : 7 ranges : 99.99 s, 999.99 s, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 min, 999.9 min, 99 h 59 min, 999.9 h 11 ranges : 99.99 s, 999.99 s, 9999 s, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 min, 999.9 min, 9999 min, 99 h 59 min, 99,99 h, 999.9 h, 9999 h Electromechanical Depending on model : 3 ranges : 6 s, 60 s, 12 min 3 ranges : 6 min, 60 min, 12 h
7 ranges : Depending on model : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 6 ranges : 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h 8 ranges : 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 4 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 60 h
RE8
RE 88 867 ///
RE 88 896 20/ RE 88 875 /// RE 88 857 /// RE 88 226 /// RE 88 896 ///
3/47 (1) 3/51, 3/55 and 3/57 (1)
3/34 to 3/37
3/40 to 3/45
3/3
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Conforming to IEC 1812-1 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 50 350 > 10 Temperature Voltage Setting accuracy at full scale Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Minimum duration of Typical control impulse Maximum reset time Typical by de-energisation Immunity time Typical to microbreaks
ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Multivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption
Hz
Depending on model
W W VA
Depending on version, see pages 3/6 and 3/7 50/60 85110 % Un 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Derating Maximum permissible current Minimum breaking current Leakage current Maximum switching voltage Typical voltage drop at terminals Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength conforming to IEC 664, IEC 255-5 A mA A mA mA V Solid state "/$ 0.7 at 20 C (0.5 A UL) 5 / C 20 10 ms 10 <5 "/$ 250 3-wire 4V - 2-wire 8V 108 operations 108 operations 2.5 at 1 mA / 1 min
kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 1 LED Green Operating status indication: Pulsing : relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing : timing in progress On steady : relay energised, no timing in progress
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage : 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the timer
3/4
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature limits Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Panel-mounted Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C kV IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UL us, CSA - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts, conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1)
Symmetrical mounting rail (EN 50022) Without cable end With cable end
Spring terminals, 2 terminals Flexible cable per connection point Solid cable Enclosure material
3/5
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation
Function H
Timing on energisation Pulse-on energisation
U R
Function Li
Asymmetrical recycler Pulse start
U R
U R T
T1 T2
Function B
Timing on impulse, one shot
Function L
Asymmetrical recycler Start after pause
Function Di
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in operating position
U R
U C R T
U R T1 T2
T T
References
560847 560848
Screw terminals
45
60 5,5
3/6
81
Function C
Off-delay, with control contact
U C R T
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory
U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
Function Ht
Delay on energisation with memory
U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
Function D
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in rest position
U R T T
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable)
U C R T T
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact
U C R T T
560848
560849
Connection schemes
Functions A, H
U A1 A2
MULTI
Function U
U A1 Y1 Y1
Functions L, Li
U A1 A2 Y1 (1)
A2 R
18 R
18 R
3/7
Characteristics
Presentation
560853
The RE9 range of relays is designed for simple, repetitive applications with short and intensive cycles because their solid state output provides very high electrical durability. Each relay has a single timing range. Each relay has a wide voltage range from 24 to 240 V. The range comprises 9 references with 3 model types: # RE9-TA: function A, # RE9-RA: function C, # RE9-MS: multifunction A, H, L, Li. These products have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications & marking Ambient air temperature around the device Permissible relative humidity range Vibration resistance Shock resistance Degree of protection Degree of pollution Overvoltage category Rated insulation voltage Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6, 10 to 55 Hz Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 Casing Terminals Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC Conforming to CSA Dielectric test Shock wave Power supply circuit Power supply circuit Power supply circuit In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 N.m Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 CISPR11 CISPR22 Hz V V kV kV C C
IEC 61812-1, EN 61812-1 CSA, GL pending. UL Zelio Time timing relays conform to European regulations relating to & marking - 40+ 85 - 20+ 60 1585 % Environmental class 3K3 a = 0.35 ms 15 gn - 11 ms IP 50 IP 20 3 III 250 300 2.5 4.8 0.851.1 Uc 50/60 5 % > 0.1 Uc Any position 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 0.61.1 Level 3 (6 kV contact, 8 kV air) Level 3 (10 V/m) Level 3 (2 kV) Level 3 (2 kV) Group 1 class A Class A
Test voltage for insulation tests Voltage limits Frequency limits Disconnection value Mounting position without derating Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Tightening torque Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic fields Fast transients Shock waves Radiated and conducted emissions
3/8
Characteristics
(continued)
3
RE9-TA On-delay V Of the control circuit Hz Mechanical only From contact to RE9 Input Y2 m mA 7 24240 0.851.1 Un 5060 5 % In series < 20 % <1% After the time delay period ms ms ms ms 100 100 2
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Voltage limits Frequency Control contact Maximum length of connecting cable Control input consumption Setting accuracy Repeat accuracy Minimum reset time Minimum switching time Maximum immunity to microbreaks Temperature drift
Between Y2 and A2 20 5
In series
Timing characteristics
3
40 2 70 2
During the time delay period After the time delay period
3/9
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation
Supply
Function C
Off-delay
Supply
Function H
Timing on energisation Pulse-on energisation
Supply
Load
Load
t
t
Function Di
Function D
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in rest position
Supply
== t t
= = t t
References
560854 560855 560855
$ or " 24240 V " 24240 V 0.1 s10 s 0.3 s30 s 3 s300 s 40 s60 min
Weight (kg)
Dimensions
Rail mounting Screw fixing
80 6 78 89,5 82
Characteristics : pages 3/8 and 3/9 Schemes : page 3/11
3/10
78
Schemes
Terminal blocks
RE9 TA RE9 RA RE9 MS
A1
A1
A1
X4
Y2
A2
X1
X2
X3
RE9-TA K A1
Load
Supply " or $
RE9 RA
The timing relay is placed in series with the load whose de-energisation is to be delayed. Switch K is connected to terminals Y2 and A2 of the timing relay, and terminal A2 is connected to the mains supply, as indicated in the diagram opposite. The device is operated from an a.c. mains supply whose voltage is between 24 V and 240 V. See function diagram on page opposite.
RE9-RA A1
Load
Y2
A2
Supply " or $
RE9 MS
Delay on energisation Function A Pulse-on energisation Function H Selection of the timing range X3-X4 not linked : range 3 s300 s (factory configuration)
Load
X3 X4
A1
RE9-MS
Supply " or $
Load A1 A2
X1 K A1
X3 X4 L RE9-MS
A1
A2
Supply "
X1 X2 X3 X4 K A1 RE9-MS
Supply "
Load
X2 X3 X4 A2 K A1 RE9-MS
Supply "
Load
A1
A1
A2
Link to be made between terminals X2 and X4 on one side and between X1 and X2 on the other side
Note : For supply voltages greater than 30 V, the rated voltage of the load is equal to the supply voltage. For a supply voltage of 24 V, the voltage drop within the RE9 relay must be taken into account (about 3 V); a coil with a nominal voltage of 21 V must therefore be selected for the load.
3/11
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Conforming to IEC 1812-1 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 30 100 100 > 10 Temperature Voltage Setting accuracy at full scale Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Minimum duration of Typical control impulse Typical under load Maximum reset time Typical by de-energisation Immunity time Typical to microbreaks
ms ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Multivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption
Hz
Depending on model
W W VA
Depending on version, see pages 3/10 50/60 85110 % of Un 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength Impulse voltage A mA V Relay, 1 C/O contact, AgNi (cadmium-free) " 2000 VA, $ 80 W " 8, $ 8 10 /$ 5 V "/$ 250 105 operations 8 A 250 V resistive 5 x 106 operations 2.5/1min/1 mA/50 Hz 5, wave 1.2/50 s
kV kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 1 LED Green Operating status indication Pulsing : relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing : timing in progress On steady : relay energised, no timing in progress
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage : 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the relay
3/12
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UL us, CSA, GL except RE 88 826 503 Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Panel-mounted Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C kV - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts, conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply, conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1)
Symmetrical mounting rail (EN 50022) Without cable end With cable end
Spring terminals, 2 terminals Flexible cable per connection point Solid cable Enclosure material
3/13
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation
Function H
Timing on energisation Pulse-on energisation
U R
Function Li
Asymmetrical recycler Pulse start
U R
U R T
T1 T2
Function B
Timing on impulse, one shot
Function L
Asymmetrical recycler Start after pause
Function Di
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in operating position
U R
U C R T
U R T1 T2
T T
References
560851 560850 560851
Connection Functions
/ / Multifunction Dual function A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D A - At Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 8A 8A RE 88 826 105 RE 88 826 115 0.060 0.060
/ Single function B
45
60 5,5
3/14
81
Function C
Off-delay, with control contact
U C R T
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory
U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
Function Ht
Delay on energisation with memory
U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
Function D
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in rest position
U R T T
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable)
U C R T T
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact
U C R T T
560851
560851
560852
560850
/ Single function C
/ Dual function H - Ht
/ Dual function Li - L
560850
Connection scheme
All functions except L and Li
U + + (1) A1 Y1 15 R A1 Y1 15 R
Functions L and Li
U
A2 16 18
A2 16 15
3/15
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Full scale setting accuracy Minimum duration of control impulse Maximum reset time by de-energisation Immunity time to microbreaks Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Temperature Voltage Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Typical Typical under load Typical Typical 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 30 100 100 > 10
ms ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Mutivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption
Hz
Depending on model
W W VA
Depending on version, see pages 3/18 and 3/19 50/60 85110 % Un (85120 Un for "/$ 12 V ) 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength Impulse voltage A mA V Relay, C/O contact AgNi (cadmium free) " 2000 VA, $ 80 W " 8, $ 8 10 / $ 5 V "/$ 250 105 operations 8 A 250 V resistive 5 x 106 operations 2.5/1min/1 mA/50 Hz 5, wave 1.2/50 s
kV kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 2 LEDs Green Operating state indication green LED Pulsing: relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing: timing in progress On steady: relay energised, no timing in progress Yellow On-delay relay
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage: 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the timer
3/16
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UL us, CSA, GL except RE 88 865 503 Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Front panel Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C kV - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Product certifications
Temperature limits
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply, conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1)
30 % / 10 ms 60 % / 100 ms 95 % / 5 s Class B
Symmetrical mounting rail (EN 50022) Without cable end With cable end
Spring terminals, 2 terminals Flexible cable per connection point Solid cable Enclosure material
3/17
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation
Function H
Timing on energisation
Function Li
Asymmetrical recycler Pulse start
U R
U R T
U R T
T1 T2
Function B
Timing on impulse, one shot
Function L
Asymmetrical recycler Start after pause
U R T1 T2
Function Di
Flashing relay Pulse start
U R T T
U C R T
References
561171 561172 561172
Connection Functions
/ / Multifunction Dual function A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D A - At Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 8A RE 88 865 105 0.090 8A RE 88 865 115 0.090
/ Single function B
Weight (kg)
57
78
18 16 A2 95 5
3/18
Function C
Off-delay
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory
U C
Function Ht
Delay on energisation with memory
U C R
Function D
Flashing relay Start after pause
U R T T
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable)
U C R T
U C R T T
R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
t1
t2 T = t1+t2
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact
U C R T T
Function Q
Star-delta starting
U R T Ti
561173
561172
561172
561172
/ Single function C
/ Dual function H - Ht
/ Dual function Li - L
/ Single function Q
561172
/ Single function Q
561171
561174
1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 8A RE 88 865 135 0.090 8A RE 88 865 145 0.090 8A RE 88 865 155 0.090
Connection schemes
All functions except L and Li
U + + (1) A1 Y1 15 R A1 Y1 15 R A1 15 R
Functions L and Li
U
Function Q
U +
A2 16 18
A2 16 15
A2 28 18
3/19
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Full scale setting accuracy Minimum duration of control impulse Maximum reset time by de-energisation Immunity time to microbreaks Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Temperature Voltage Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Typical Typical under load Typical Typical 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 30 100 100 > 10
ms ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Multivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption
Hz
Depending on model
W W VA
Depending on version, see pages 3/22 and 3/23 50/60 85110 % Un (85120 Un for "/$ 12 V ) 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength Impulse voltage A mA V Relay, C/O contacts, AgNi (cadmium-free) " 2000 VA, $ 80 W " 8, $ 8 10 / $ 5 V "/$ 250 105 operations 8 A 250 V resistive 5 x 106 operations 2.5/1min/1 mA/50 Hz 5, wave 1.2/50 s
kV kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 2 LEDs Green Operating state indication green LED Pulsing: relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing: timing in progress On steady: relay energised, no timing in progress Yellow On-delay relay
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage: 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the timer
3/20
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UL us, CSA GL except RE 88 865 265 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 except RE 88 865 265 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Product certifications Temperature limits Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Front panel Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C kV
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply, conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks, conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1)
Symmetrical mounting rail (EN 50022) Without cable end With cable end
mm mm2 mm2
90
3/21
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation, 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function C
Off-delay 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2 T T
U R1/R2 R2 INST T
U C R1/R2 R2 inst.
R2 Inst.
Function B
Function Ht
Delay on energisation with memory 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2
Function Di
Flashing relay Pulse start 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U R1/R2 T T
Timing on impulse, one shot 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2 R2 Inst. T
t1 R2 Inst.
t2 T = t1+t2
R2 Inst.
References
561175 561176
Connection Functions Timing ranges Relay output Rated current Voltages Weight (kg)
Screw terminals
7 ranges 4 ranges
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 2 timed contacts, 1 convertible to instantaneous 8A RE 88 865 305 0.090
63
22,5
57
78
18
16 A2
95 5
3/22
Function K
Delay on de-energisation True off-delay (without auxiliary supply) 2 timed contacts
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C T R1/R2 t1 R2 Inst. T = t1+t2 t2
Function H
Timing on energisation 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function D
Flashing relay Start after pause 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U R1/R2
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable) 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U R1/R2
U R1/R2 T R2 Inst.
U C
T T R2 Inst.
R1/R2 T R2 Inst. T
561176
/ Single function K 0.6 s - 2.5 s - 20 s - 160 s 2 timed contacts 8A RE 88 865 265 0.090
561176
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 2 timed contacts, 1 convertible to instantaneous 8A RE 88 865 303 0.090
Connection schemes
All functions except K
U + + 15 R1 A2 16 18 26/22 28/24 16 18 26 28 25 R2
Function K
U
A1
Y1
15 R1
25/21 R2
A1
A2
3/23
Characteristics
Presentation
560872
The RE7 range of relays, with only 23 references, covers all timing applications. These relays offer multi-range timing from 50 ms to 300 h. They are multivoltage. Three models combine several different functions: multifunction relays. These products have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications & marking Ambient air temperature around the device Permissible relative humidity range Vibration resistance Shock resistance Degree of protection
Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6, 10 to 55 Hz Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 Casing Terminals Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC Conforming to CSA
C C
IEC 61812-1, EN 61812-1 CSA, GL pending, UL Zelio Time timing relays conform to European regulations relating to & marking - 40+ 85 - 20+ 60 1585 % Environmental class 3K3 a = 0.35 ms 15 gn - 11 ms IP 50 IP 20 3 III 250 300
Degree of pollution Overvoltage category Rated insulation voltage Between contact circuit and power supply or between contact circuit and control inputs Test voltage for Dielectric test insulation tests Shock wave Voltage limits Power supply circuit Frequency limits Power supply circuit Disconnection value Power supply circuit Mounting position In relation to normal without derating vertical mounting plane Cabling Flexible cable without cable end Maximum c.s.a. Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic fields Fast transients Shock waves Radiated and conducted emissions Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 CISPR11 CISPR22
V V
kV kV Hz
2.5 4.8 0.851.1 Uc 50/60 5 % > 0.1 Uc Any position 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 0.61.1 Level 3 (6 kV contact, 8 kV air) Level 3 (10 V/m) Level 3 (2 kV) Level 3 (2 kV) Group 1 class A Class A $ 24 V 0.5 0.8 2
Consumption
Average consumption " 50/60 Hz 24 V 48 V 110 V VA 0.7 1.6 1.8 RE7-//11BU RE7-//12BU and RE7-//13BU VA 1.2 2 2.8 RE7-////MW (1) VA 2 2.5 3.2 (1) RE7-RB//MW: current peak on energisation = 1 A / 30 ms. 240 V 8.5 12.5 6 W W W 48 V 1.2 1.6 1 110 V 3.2 240 V 2
3/24
Characteristics (continued)
Timing characteristics
Setting accuracy Repeat accuracy Influence of voltage Influence of temperature Immunity to microbreaks Minimum control pulse Reset time As % of the full-scale value In the voltage range, 0.851.1 Un ms ms ms V A A A 10 % 0.2 % < 0.2 % < 0.07 %/C 3 20 (except RE7-RB1/MW: 1 s) 50 7 250 20 8 (except RE7-RB//MW: 5 A) 24 V 115 V 3 3 2 0.2 12 V/10 mA 90/10 nickel silver (except RE7-RB//MU: gold flashed silver alloy) 60 <1 50 3/4-wire PNP and NPN Telemecanique sensors or other sensors without an internal load Linear at 20 % 47 20 % 0.2 25 by shielded cable: shielding linked to terminal Z2 d.c. load Load limit curve
250 V 3 0.1
Applicable to inputs Y1Z2, X1Z2, X2Z2 Switching current Maximum distance Compatibility
V mA m
k W m
Curve 2 Reduction factor k for inductive loads (applies to values taken from durability curve 1)
Reduction factor k
Voltage in V
10
300 200
100
3 2 1
0,1 0,4
50 40 30 20
A
0,01 0,3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Current broken in A 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 Power factor on breaking (cos ) 10 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2
A
5 10 20 Current in A
A RE7-RB//MW
A 1 2 3
Example: An LC1-F185 contactor supplied with 115 V/50 Hz for a consumption of 55 VA or a current consumption equal to 0.1 A and cos = 0.3. For 0.1 A, curve 1 indicates a durability of approximately 1.5 million operating cycles. As the load is inductive, it is necessary to apply a reduction coefficient k to this number of cycles as indicated by curve 2. For cos = 0.3: k = 0.6 The electrical durability therefore becomes: 1.5 106 operating cycles x 0.6 = 900 000 operating cycles.
+
RE7
3/25
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation
Function Wt
External control for start of time delay
Function At
External control for partial stop of time delay (with memory)
Supply
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Supply
t1
t3 t2
C/O
15/18 15/16
C/O
15/18 15/16
t = t1 + t2 + t3
Function H
Function Hi
Start on opening of external control contact
Function Ht
External control for partial stop of time delay (with memory)
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Supply Start
Y1Z2
Supply
Partial stop
X1Z2
t1
C/O
15/18 15/16
t2
t3
C/O
15/18 15/16
t = t1 + t2 + t3
References
560873 560873 560874 560874
Functions Timing ranges Voltages $ or " 24 V " 110240 V " or $ 4248 V $ or " 24240 V
References
Weight (kg)
0.150
0.150
0.150
0.150
80 6 78 89,5 82 22,5 4
Characteristics : pages 3/24 and 3/25 Schemes : pages 3/30 and 3/31
3/26
78
Function Ac
Remote control for partial stop of time delay
Function Ae
External control for start of time delay
Function Af
Asymmetrical On-delay and Off-delay with external control
Function K
Off-delay
> 1 s (1)
Function Hf
Remote control for stop of time delay
Supply
Y1
Start
Y1Z2
Supply Start
Supply
Supply C/O
C/O
15/18 15/16
Y1Z2
External control
C/O
X1Z2 Partial stop time delay
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
t1
C/O
t2
t3
t4
Partial stop
X1Z2
C/O
15/18 15/16
t1
ts t2 t3
ts
t4
ta
tr
t1 + t2 = ta t3 + t4 = tr
t1 ts t2
Function D
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in rest position
Function L
Start with output in rest position (X2Z2 not linked)
Function Li
Asymmetrical flasher. Start with output in operating position (X2Z2 linked)
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Function Lt
External control for partial stop of time delay
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Supply
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
C/O
tr
ta
ta
tr
Partial stop
X1Z2
t1 ts t2 t3 ts t4
(1) If the device has been stored, de-energised, for more than a month, it must be energised for about 15 seconds in order to activate it. Subsequently, it only takes 1 second to start the time delay. % If this time is not complied with, the relay remains energised indefinitely.
560875
560875
560876
560876
560877
0.150
Hf 0.05 s...300 h 10 ranges / / / RE7 RA11BU RE7 RM11BU low level contact 0.150
560877
0.150
0.150
0.150
0.150
Connection schemes
RE7 TL11BU
A1
B1 A1
RE7 RB11MW
A1
A1
RE7 PE11BU
A1
B1 A1
15
B1
15
15
15
15
B1
15
A2
A2
A2
A2
16
18
16
18
16
18
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
X1 18
Y1 16
Z2 A2
X1 18
A2
16
18
Y1 16
Z2 A2
RE7 CL11BU
A1
B1 A1
RE7 CV11BU
A1 Z1 15 Z3 B1 B2 15 16 X2 16 18 Z2 A2
15
B1
15
A2
16
18
18
16
A2
X1 18
A2
B1 B2 A1
3/27
Function diagrams
Function A
Start on energisation
Function Ac
External control for start of time delay
Supply Start
Y1Z2
Function C
Off-delay with external control for start of time delay
Supply
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Start
C/O
C/O
15/18 15/16
ta
tr
Function K
Off-delay
3
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
> 1 s (1)
(1) If the device has been stored, de-energised, for more than a month, it must be energised for about 15 seconds in order to activate it. Subsequently, it only takes 1 second to start the time delay. % If this time is not complied with, the relay remains energised indefinitely.
References
560904 560902 560903 560904
Functions Timing ranges Voltages $ or " 24 V " 110240 V " or $ 4248 V $ or " 24240 V
80 6 78 89,5 82 22,5 4
Characteristics : pages 3/24 and 3/25 Schemes : pages 3/30 and 3/31
3/28
78
Function H
Pulse-on energisation Start on energisation
Supply
Function Hi
Start on opening of external control contact
Function Qt
Timing relays for star-delta starters
Function Qg
Timing relays for star-delta starters
Function D
Symmetrical flasher, start with output in rest position
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Supply C/O
15/18 (25/28) 15/16 (25/26)
Start
t
C/O
15/18 15/16
C/O2
25/28 25/26 K1
star
t
delta
50 ms
50 ms
Function Di
Symmetrical flasher start with output in operating position
Supply
C/O
560905
560905
560906
560907
560907
560908
A, C, H, Hi, D, Di, Qg, Qt 0.05 s...300 h 10 ranges / / / / RE7 MY13BU RE7 MY13MW 0.150 0.150
Connection schemes
RE7 TP13BU
A1 Z1
B1 B2 A1
RE7 RB13MW
B1 B2
25 (21)
RE7 YA
A1
B1 B2 A1
560908
15 25 (21)
15
A1 Z1
A1
15 25
15 25
B1 B2
25
A1 Y1
B1 B2 A1
15 25 (21)
15
B1 B2
25 (21)
15 25 (21)
15
B1 B2
25 (21) 26 (22) 28 (24)
26 (22) 28 (24)
A2
A2
A2
A2
26 (22) 28 (24)
A2
18
16
26
28
18
16
26
28
16
18
16
18
28 (24) 18
26 (22) 16
Z2 A2
28 18
26 16
Z2 A2
28 18
26 16
Z2 A2
28 (24) 18
26 (22) 16
Z2 A2
28 (24) 18
16
26 (22) 16
18
Z2 A2
RE7 YR
A1
B1 B2 A1
RE7 MY13BU
17 17
17
RE7 MY13MW
B1 Y1
25 (21)
B1 B2
B1
A1 Z1
A1
15 25 (21)
15
A1 Z1
A1
15 25 (21)
15
Y1 X1
25 (21) 26 (22) 28 (24)
26 (22) 28 (24)
A2
A2
A2
18
16
26
28
18
16
28 18
26 16
Z2 A2
28 (24) 18
26 (22) 16
Z2 A2
28 (24) 18
16
26 (22) 16
18
Z2 A2
3/29
Schemes
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
B1
B2 A2
A1
B1
B2 A2
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Z2
A2
Z2
(3)
A1 Y1
B1
B2
A1 X1
B1
B2 A2
A1 X1 Z2
A1 A2
A1 A2
Y1 A2
B2
Y1 A2
B1 Y1
RE7 PP Start on energisation RE7 PE Start on energisation RE7 CV Selection of starting phase
(1) (2)
(3)
(1) (2)
(1) (3)
(3)
B1
B2 A2
A1
B1
B2 A2
B3
B1
B2 A2
A1 X2 Z2
(6)
RE7 TM, TP, MA, RA, RM, PP, PM, ML, MY Connection of potentiometer
Supply
A2
Z1 Z2
A2
Z3 Z1 Z2
(4)
(5)
A2
Z3 Z1 Z2
(7)
(8)
X1 or Y1 or Z1
A2
Z2
No galvanic isolation between supply terminals A1, A2, B1, B2 and control inputs X1, Y1, Z1, Z2. (1) " 110240 V except RE7 MY13MW : 7 24240 V (2) 7 1248 V (3) 7 24 V (4) Adjustment of the On-delay period (5) Adjustment of the Off-delay period (6) Start during the On-delay period : X2, Z2 linked. Start during the Off-delay period : X2, Z2 not linked (7) Off-delay adjustment (tr) (contact 15/16 closed) (8) On-delay adjustment (ta) (contact 15/18 closed)
3/30
Schemes (continued)
F2
21 96
B1 B2 A1
95
A1
15 25
15
B1 B2
25 26
A2
18
13 22
K2
2 4 6
K3
2 4 6
K1
14
S2
22 15
22 25
F2
2 4 6
K1T
K1T
28 13
14 K1 13
K2
28 18
16
26 16
Z2 A2
16
14
28
S1
1 3 5
W1 V1 U1 M1 3
V2 U2 W2
K3
A1 21 A1 A1
K1
A1 21
3
K1T = relay RE7 YA
K1
A2
K1T
A2
K2
A2
K3 N
A2
Control schemes Star-delta function with contact for switching to star connection Q
F3 F2
21 96
B1 B2 A1
Terminal block
95
A1
17 17
17 18 16
B1 B2
A2
13 22
K2
2 4 6
K3
2 4 6
K1
2 4 6
53
14
17
54
S2
K2
28 18
17 13 13
26 16
26
Z2 A2
22 18
22 28
W1 V1 U1 M1 3
V2
A1
K3
A1 21
K1
A1 21 A1
U2 W2
K1T
K1
A2 A2
K3
A2
K2
A2
14
14
F2
K1T
K2
K1
No galvanic isolation between supply terminals A1, A2, B1, B2 and supply terminal Z2. This terminal must therefore never be used (factory setting). Control of several relays with a single external control contact Connection of a Telemecanique 3-wire NPN or PNP sensor
+
A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1 Z2 A2 A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1 Z2 A2 A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1 Z2 A2 A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1 A2 Z2
Supply
It is advisable to follow the recommended wiring schemes detailed above and on previous pages. However, the connections below are possible if the restrictions given are taken into account. Connection of an external control contact without using terminal Z2: Connection of a Telemecanique 3-wire NPN or PNP sensor without using terminal Z2: - possible on all RE7 relays with external control option except RE7 RA11BU, - only possible on relay RE7////BU, - d.c. supply only. - d.c. supply only.
+
A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1 Z2 A2
+
A1,B1 or B12 Y1 or X1
+
24 or 48 V
Supply
BN BK BU
NPN PNP
+
B1B2 A2 Y1 Z2 BN BK BU NPN
24 or 48 V
B1B2 A2
A2
Z2
Y1 Z2
BN BK BU
PNP
3/31
28
S1
Characteristics
Presentation
The RE8 range of relays is designed for simple and repetitive applications, providing basic functions. Each relay comprises: - a single timing range, - a C/O output relay. These products have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
560953
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications & marking Ambient air temperature around the device Permissible relative humidity range Vibration resistance Shock resistance Degree of protection Degree of pollution Overvoltage category Rated insulation voltage Test voltage for insulation tests Voltage limits Frequency limits Disconnection value Mounting position without derating Connection maximum c.s.a. Tightening torque Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic fields Fast transients Shock waves Radiated and conducted emissions
Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6, 10 to 55 Hz Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 Casing Terminals Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC Conforming to CSA Dielectric test Shock wave Power supply circuit Power supply circuit Power supply circuit In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
C C
IEC 61812-1. EN 61812-1 CSA, GL pending. UL Zelio Time timing relays conform to European regulations relating to & marking - 40+ 85 - 20+ 60 1585 % Environmental class 3K3 a = 0.35 ms 15 gn - 11 ms IP 50 IP 20 3 III 250 300 2.5 4.8 0.91.1 Uc 50/60 5 % > 0.1 Uc Any position 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 0.61.1 Level 3 (6 kV contact, 8 kV air) Level 3 (10 V/m) Level 3 (2 kV) Level 3 (2 kV) Group 1 class A Class A " 24 V 0.7 0.9 0.9 $ 24 V 0.5 0.5 0.7
V V kV kV Hz
Consumption
Consumption RE8-TA, RA, CL, PE, PU, PT RE8-YG, RB RE8-YA VA VA VA 110 V 1.8 2.5 2.5 240 V 8.5 13 13 380 V 8 415 V 9 W W W
3/32
Characteristics (continued)
Timing characteristics
Setting accuracy Repeat accuracy Influence of voltage Influence of temperature Immunity to microbreaks Minimum control pulse Reset time As % of the full-scale value In the voltage range, 0.91.1 Un ms ms ms V A A A 20 % <1 % < 2.5 % < 0.2 %/C 3 26 (except RE8-YG: 60) 50 7 250 20 8 24 V 3 2 12 V/10 mA 90/10 nickel silver
115 V 3 0.2
250 V 3 0.1
a.c. load Curve 1 Electrical durability of contacts on resistive load in millions of operating cycles
Millions of operating cycles
Curve 2 Reduction factor k for inductive loads (applies to values taken from durability curve 1)
Reduction factor k
10
Voltage in V
300 200
100
3 2 1
0,1 0,4
50 40 30 20
A
0,01 0,3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Current broken in A 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 Power factor on breaking (cos ) 0,2 10 0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2
A
5 10 20 Current in A
A RE8-RB//BUTQ
A 1 2 3
Example: An LC1-F185 contactor supplied with 115 V/50 Hz for a consumption of 55 VA or a current consumption equal to 0.1 A and cos = 0.3. For 0.1 A, curve 1 indicates a durability of approximately 1.5 million operating cycles. As the load is inductive, it is necessary to apply a reduction coefficient k to this number of cycles as indicated by curve 2. For cos = 0.3: k = 0.6 The electrical durability therefore becomes: 1.5 106 operating cycles x 0.6 = 900 000 operating cycles.
+
RE8
3/33
Function diagrams
Function A
Start on energisation
Supply
Function C
With control contact
Supply
C/O
15/18 15/16
Start
C/O
15/18 15/16
560954
Functions Voltages
Timing ranges
$ or " 24 V " 110240 V " 380415 V 0.05 s0.5 s 0.1 s3 s 0.1 s10 s 0.3 s30 s 3 s300 s 20 s30 min
Weight (kg)
A / / RE8 TA61BUTQ RE8 TA11BUTQ RE8 TA31BUTQ RE8 TA21BUTQ RE8 TA41BUTQ 0.110
560954
Dimensions
Dimensions
Rail mounting Screw fixing
80 6 78 89,5 82 22,5 4
Characteristics : pages 3/32 and 3/33 Schemes : page 3/35
3/34
78
Function K
Off-delay
Supply
Function D
Symmetrical
Supply
C/O
15/18 15/16
C/O
15/18 15/16
> 80 ms
560954
560954
Schemes
Connection schemes
RE8 TA, CL
A1
B1 A2
RE8 TA, CL
15 B1
15
RE8 RA
15
15
B1
A1
A2
A1
B1 A2
start
A1
A1
16
18
A1
16
18
16
18
B1 A1
A2 A2
A1 Y1
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
+
A1 A2 Y1 A1 A2 Y1 A1 A2 Y1
C A1 A2
If
Y1
The external control contact C may be an electronic control device, for example a 2-wire sensor. In this case A1-A2 = $ 24 V and the control device can only control up to a maximum of 4 relays. Leakage current (open state) If < 1 mA.
3/35
Function diagrams
Function H
Pulse-on energisation
Supply
Function W
Start on opening of external control contact
Supply
C/O
15/18 15/16
Start
Y1A1
C/O
15/18 15/16
Functions Voltages
Timing ranges
$ or " 24 V " 110240 V " 380415 V 0.05 s0.5 s 0.1 s3 s 0.1 s10 s 0.3 s30 s 3 s300 s 20 s30 min
Weight (kg)
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
Rail mounting Screw fixing
80 6 78 89,5 82 22,5 4
RE8 PD
15
15
RE8 PT
15 Y1
15
6
RE8 YA
15
15
78
RE8 YG
15
15
B1
A1
A2
A1
B1 A2
B1
A1
A2
25
25
A1
B1 A2
15
B1
15
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
16
18
18
16
16
18
16
28
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
18
16
A2
28
16
A2
18
16
16
3/36
18
A2
Function He
Pulse-on energisation, start on de-energisation
Supply
Function Qc
Timing relay for star-delta starters
Supply
15/18 15/16
Function Qe
Timing relay for star-delta starters
Supply C/O N/O
15/16 25/28
C/O
15/18 15/16
t > 80 ms
<t
Star Delta
t t 50 ms
80 ms
560969
560968
560969
+
start
B1 A1
A2 A2
A1 Y1
RE8 YG
RE8 YA
Q1
W1
U1
V1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
W2
U2
V2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
(1) K1T : RE8-YG/1//TQ (1) K1T : RE8-YA32//TQ Note : Correct operation of the star-delta starter associated with the RE8 YG is only possible if the wiring scheme is strictly complied with. Characteristics : pages 3/32 and 3/33 Dimensions : page 3/36
A2
(1)
(1)
A1
Rth
28
16
15
16
15
25
KM2
KM3
KM1
3/37
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Full scale setting accuracy Minimum duration of control impulse Maximum reset time by de-energisation Immunity time to microbreaks Multivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Temperature Voltage Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Typical Typical under load Typical Typical 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 30 100 100 > 10
ms ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Hz Depending on version, see pages 3/40 and 3/41 50/60 85110 Un % (85120 Un for "/$ 12 V ) 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Depending on model
W W VA
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength Impulse voltage A mA V Relay, 1 or 2 C/O contacts, AgNi (cadmium -free) " 2000 VA, $ 80 W " 8, $ 8 10/$ 5 V "/$ 250 105 operations 8 A 250 V resistive 5 x 106 operations 2.5/1min/1 mA/50 Hz 5, wave 1.2/50 s
kV kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 1 LED Green Operating status indication Pulsing: relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing: timing in progress On steady: relay energised, no timing in progress
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage: 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the timer
3/38
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UR us, CSA, GL Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Front panel C C kV - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply, conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1) Fixing Enclosure material Plug-in socket 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Vibration resistance
8-pin Self-extinguishing
3/39
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation 1 contact 2 timed contacts
Function C
Off-delay 1 timed contact
U R T
U R1/R2 T
U C R T
Function Di
Flashing relay Pulse start
Function B
Timing on impulse, one shot
Function Ht
Delay on energisation with memory
3
U R T T U C R T U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
References
561177 561178 561178
Connection Functions
Plug-in sub-base
7 ranges
/ / Multifunction Single function A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D A Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 1 timed contact 2 timed contacts 8A 8A RE 88 867 105 RE 88 867 215 0.080 0.080 RUZ 1D RUZ 1D 0.067 0.067 (1) These products are sold in packs of 10
/ Single function C
3/40
45
Function L
Asymmetrical recycler Start after pause
Function D
Flashing relay Start after pause
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory
Function H
Timing on energisation
Function Li
Asymmetrical recycler Pulse start
U R T1 T2
U R T T
U C R t1 t2 T = t1+t2
U R T
U R T1 T2
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable)
U U C R R T T T T C
561179
561178
/ Dual function Li - L 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 1 timed contact 8A RE 88 867 155 0.080 RUZ 1D 0.067
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw
561178
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw
Connection schemes
Timing relays with 1 relay output All functions except L and Li Functions L and Li Timing relays with 2 relay outputs Function A
+ U 4 3 2 R 7 1 8 5 6
+ U 4 3 2 R 7 1 8 5 (1) 6
+ U 4 3 R1 2 1 8 5 R2 6 7
3/41
Characteristics
Timing characteristics
Repeat accuracy (with constant parameters) Drift Full scale setting accuracy Minimum duration of control impulse Maximum reset time by de-energisation Immunity time to microbreaks Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Temperature Voltage Conforming to IEC 1812-1 Typical Typical under load Typical Typical 0.5 % 0.05 % / C 0.2 % / V 10 % at 25 C 30 100 100 > 10
ms ms ms ms
Supply characteristics
Multivoltage supply Frequency Operating range On-load factor Maximum power consumption
Hz
Depending on model
W W VA
Depending on version, see pages 3/44 and 3/45 50/60 85110 % Un (85120 Un for "/$ 12 V ) 100 % 0.6 1.5 32
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life Mechanical life Dielectric strength Impulse voltage A mA V Relay, C/O contacts, AgNi (cadmium free) " 2000 VA, $ 80 W " 8, $ 8 10 /$ 5 V "/$ 250 105 operations 8 A 250 V resistive 5 x 106 operations 2.5/1min/1 mA/50 Hz 5, wave 1.2/50 s
kV kV
Display characteristics
State indication by 1 LED Green Operating status indication Pulsing: relay energised, no timing in progress (except Di-D and Li-L) Flashing: timing in progress On steady: relay energised, no timing in progress
Input characteristics
Input type V Volt-free contact (no potential) Control possible by 3-wire sensor with PNP output, maximum residual voltage: 0.4 V whatever the supply voltage of the timer
3/42
Characteristics (continued)
General characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 1812-1, EN 50081-1/2, EN 50082-1/2, LV directives (73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC (& marking) + EMC (89/336/EEC + IEC 669-2-3) c UR us, CSA, GL Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Terminal block Enclosure Front panel Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 C C kV - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 4 kV/3 IP 20 IP 40 IP 50 f = 1055 Hz A = 0.35 mm 93 % Level III (Air 8 kV/Contact 6 kV)
Vibration resistance
Conforming to IEC 68-2-3 Immunity to electrostatic discharge, conforming to IEC 1000-42 Immunity to electromagnetic fields, conforming to ENV 50140/204 (IEC 1000-4-3) Immunity to fast transients in bursts, conforming to IEC 1000-4-4 Immunity to surges on the power supply, conforming to IEC 1000-4-5 Immunity to radio frequency interference in common mode conforming to ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) Immunity to voltage dips and breaks, conforming to IEC 1000-4-11 Radiated and mains conducted disturbance, conforming to EN 55022 (EN 55011 Group 1)
Plug-in socket
11-pin Self-extinguishing
3/43
Function diagrams
Function A
Delay on energisation 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function C
Off-delay 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function Ac
Timing after closing/opening of control contact 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2 T T
U R1/R2 R2 INST T
U C R1/R2 R2 inst.
R2 Inst.
Function B
Function Ht
Delay on energisation wih memory 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function Di
Flashing relay Pulse start 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Timing on impulse, one shot 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2 R2 Inst. T
U R1/R2 T T R2 Inst.
References
561181 561180 561181
Connection Functions
Plug-in sub-base
7 ranges
/ / Multifunction Dual function A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D A - At Ac - Bw 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 2 timed contacts, 2 timed contacts 1 convertible to instantaneous 8A 8A RE 88 867 305 RE 88 867 415 0.080 0.080 RUZ 1A RUZ 1A 0.067 0.067 (1) These products are sold in packs of 10
/ Single function C
3/44
45
Function Bw
Pulse output (adjustable) 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function At
Timing on energisation with memory 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U C R1/R2
Function H
Timing on energisation 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
Function D
Flashing relay Start after pause 2 timed contacts or 2 timed contacts, 1 of which convertible to instantaneous
U R1/R2
Function L
Asymmetrical recycler Start after pause 2 timed contacts
U C R T T
U R1/R2 T
U R1/R2 T T T1 T2
t1 R2 Inst.
t2 T = t1+t2
R2 Inst.
R2 Inst.
Function Li
Asymmetrical recycler Pulse start 2 timed contacts
U R1/R2 T1 T2
561182
561180
/ Dual function Li - L 1 s - 10 s - 1 min - 10 min - 1 h - 10 h - 100 h 2 timed contacts 8A RE 88 867 455 0.080 RUZ 1A 0.067
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw
561182
/ Multifunction A - At - B - C - H - Ht - Di - D - Ac - Bw
Connection schemes
All functions except L and Li
+ U 5 4 R1 3 2 1 11 10 R2 9 Y1 6 7 8
Functions L and Li
+ U (1) 4 R1 3 2 1 11 10 R2 9 5 6 7 8
(1) Link between pins 2 and 5 for function L only. Characteristics : pages 3/42 and 3/43 Dimensions : page 3/44
3/45
4/0
Contents
# Electromechanical hour counters, 7 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/3 # Electromechanical totalising counters, 5 to 8 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/5 # Electromechanical preselection counters, 5 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/7 # Electronic preselection and multifunction counters, 48 x 48, 6 digits, LCD or LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9 # Electronic totalising counters, 24 x 48, 8 digits, LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/11 # Electronic total/partial impulse counters, 24 x 48, 8 digits, LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/13 # Electronic totalising counters, hour counters, chronometers, 24 x 48, 6 or 8 digits, LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/15 # Electronic hour counters, 24 x 48, 6 digits, LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17 # Multifunction counters with display 5 Models RC 87 618 and RC 87 619 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24 # Electronic preselection and multifunction counters 5 Models RC 87 618, 48 x 48, 5 digits, LCD or LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24 5 Models RC 87 619, 72 x 72, 6 digits, LCD or LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/25
4/1
Characteristics
XBK H hour counters Mechanical Hour counters V " 24 10 % 50 Hz " 115 10 % 50 Hz " 230 10 % 50 Hz XBK H70000001M : 0.56 XBK H70000002M : 1 XBK H70000004M : 0.08 Permanent 7 99999.99 h mm 5 Adding 1/100 of an hour Without Function Type Validation Contact
Characteristics
Function Supply voltage
Consumption
VA
Backup capacity Number of digits Display precision Digit height Counting mode Reset Inputs
4
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature
EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, VDE 0435 UL, CSA (pending) Operation Storage C C - 10+ 50 - 25+ 70 IP 65 3 gn (10 to 150 Hz) 30 gn (11 ms) Class II Flush-mounting unit fixed by a self-locking collar Screw terminal block
Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Protection against electric shocks Mounting and fixing Connection
Conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 536
4/2
References, dimensions
References
560844
Supply voltage
Reference
Weight
" 115
50
Without
XBK H70000001M
0.060
" 230
50
Without
XBK H70000002M
0.060
Dimensions
XBK H7000000/M
e
Flush-mounting
4
45
54,5 62,5
e : panel thickness, 1 mm < e < 2.5 mm
48 45
48
4/3
Characteristics
XBK T totalising counters Mechanical Totalising counters with mechanical display V $ 24 10 % $ 48 10 % " 115 10 % XBK T50000U10M and XBK T50000U08M and XBK T70000U00M : 1.5 XBK T50000U11M and XBK T60000U10M and XBK T80000U00M : 2.5 XBK T60000U11M : 2.75 XBK T60000U00M : 0.155 10, 20, 25 Permanent 5, 6, 7 or 8 9999999999999 mm 4 Adding With or without Manual Function Type Counting Contact 10 except XBK T60000U10M and XBK T80000U00M : 200
Characteristics
Functions Supply voltage
Consumption
W/VA
Counting frequency Backup capacity Number of digits Setting accuracy Digit height Counting mode
Hz
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 536 C C EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 UL, CSA (pending) (except XBK T60000U00M) - 10+ 50 except XBK T60000U00M : - 10...+ 70 -20+ 60 except XBK T60000U00M : - 40+ 85 IP 40 except XBK T60000U00M : IP 65 5 gn (10 to 150 Hz) 30 gn (6 ms) Class II Flush-mounting By AMP lugs on a cable connector
Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Protection against electric shocks Mounting and fixing Connection
4/4
References
560824
Supply voltage V $ 24
Reference
Weight kg
6 XBK T60000U00M
25
Without
XBK T60000U00M
0.030
560826
25
Manual
XBK T60000U10M
0.150
20
Without
XBK T70000U00M
0.100
XBK T60000U1/M
560827
25
Without
XBK T80000U00M
0.150
$ 48 XBK T70000U00M
560828
20
Without
XBK T50000U08M
0.100
" 115
10
Manual
XBK T50000U11M
0.100
10
Manual
XBK T60000U11M
0.030
XBK T80000U00M
Dimensions
XBK T50000U//M, XBK T70000U00M
e
Flush-mounting
XBK T60000U00M
e 20
Flush-mounting
31
27
33,7 64,2 75
e : panel thickness, 1 mm < e < 2.5 mm
30
27+0,2
41,5 38,5
42,3
XBK T60000U1/M
XBK T80000U00M
Common flush-mounting
88 101,5
60
88 94
60
= 55
Schemes
XBK T50000U//M, XBK T70000U00M
-/+
XBK T60000U10M
1 1 1
XBK T80000U00M
1
2 -/+
29,5
38
50
38
50
14,2
4/5
Characteristics
XBK P5 preselection counters Mechanical Preselection counters V W Hz $ 24 10 % 2.5 25 5 99999 mm 4 1 Adding (continuous) or subtracting (non continuous) Adding or subtracting Adding from zero or subtracting from the preset value Manual or manual and electrical Contact (20 VA/220 V/1 A max) Contact (volt-free) By AMP lugs on a cable connector
Characteristics
Function Supply voltage Consumption Counting frequency Number of digits Display capacity Digit height Number of presets Preset display Counting mode Reset
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature Operation Storage Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Protection against electric shocks Mounting and fixing Conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 536 C C EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2, EN 61010 XBK P5///D//M : CSA (pending) XBK P5///U//M : UL/CSA (pending) - 10+ 50 - 40+ 85 IP 40 5 gn (10 to 150 Hz) 30 gn (6 ms) Class II Removable and flush-mounting Fixing by screws on front panel
4/6
References
Supply voltage V $ 24 Number Counting Number of of display frequency presets digits kHz 5 25 1
560838
Reset type
Reference
Weight
XBK P50100D/0M
560839
XBK P50100D20M
0.240
XBK P50100U20M
0.240
Dimensions
XBK P50100D/0M XBK P50100U/0M
Common flush-mounting
4
63
75
63
75
88,5 102,2
60
88,5 102,2
60
= 55
Schemes
XBK P50100D/0M, XBK P50100U/0M
+ 1 2 1 22 21 20 31 21 2 32 20 22 32 31
4/7
55
Characteristics
Preselection XBK P6 LCD or LED Mulltifunction V Counter, Batch counter, totalising counter, tachometer and chronometer $ 24 or " 230 10 % or " 115 10 % $ 12 to 24 (50 mA max) for XBK P6//30G32E or XBK P6//30G31E 150 mA $ 24 V, 50mA " 230 V or " 115 V Hz 5000 (2500 for bi-directional counting) 6 999999 mm 7.6 (LED) or 9 (LCD) 1 or 2 Non continuous 5 programmable modes : - single counter input, - single counter with phase discriminator, - differential inputs, - summing inputs, - counting direction inputs. (Counter input resistance 5 k) 2 modes : reset to zero and reset to preset value Manual, electrical and automatic Relay,changeover (response time 5 ms) : $ 5 V < Uc < $ 30 V " 5 V < Uc < " 250 V 10 mA < I < 1 A Transistor PNP : $ 1224 V, 10 mA max Screw terminal block ms 17 at 30 Hz 0.1 at 5 KHz EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2, EN 61010 UL, C-UL (pending) Operation Storage C C - 0+ 50 - 20+ 70 IP 65 1 gn (10 to 150 Hz) 10 gn (18 ms) Class II Flush-mounting unit and fixing by a self-locking clamp with setscrews
Characteristics
Functions Supply voltage Sensor supply voltage Consumption Counting frequency Number of digits Display capacity Digit height Number of presets Preset display Counting mode
4
Reset Reset type Output type
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Temperature
Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Protection against electric shocks Mounting and fixing
Conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Conforming to IEC 536
4/8
References
560820
Supply voltage V
Number of presets
Reference
Weight
kg
Manual, electrical and automatic reset Preselection counters with LCD display
$ 24 XBK P61/30G3/E " 115 " 230
560821
6 6 6
5 5 5
1 2 1 2 1 2
XBK P61130G30E XBK P61230G30E XBK P61130G31E XBK P61230G31E XBK P61130G32E XBK P61230G32E
Dimensions
XBK P6//30G3/E
Flush-mounting
4
45
48 93,5 101,7 45
Schemes
XBK P6//30G3/E
$ 24 V
+
48
Red
1
R = 10 k
Blue
10
R = 10 k
$ 24 V
Black 5-wire sensor types XS, XU Blue Brown (NO) or Orange (NC) Red
1 3 10
type CAD
1 14 17
4/9
Characteristics
Technical characteristics
Function Display Digit height Counting capacity mm Impulse counter 8 digit LCD 7 099 999 999
Input characteristics
Counter type Input type RC 87 610 040 1 slow counting input by volt-free contact or NPN open-collector transistor (terminals 3 - 4) 1 fast counting input by voltage level (terminals 3 - 5) $ 430 RC 87 610 050 1 slow counting input
Voltage
V V V
Supply characteristics
2 alkaline batteries 1 lithium battery Life Life 4 years 8 years Supply can be switched off via Dipswitch n 1 located on the underside of the device
General characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Material Connection Clamping capacity Mounting method Front panel degree of protection Temperature limits Operation Storage Insulation resistance Conforming to IEC 255.5 Dielectric strength Conforming to IEC 255.5 (1) The reset is galvanically isolated from the counting input. VDE 0110, IEC 664, 348, 255.4, 255.5, 801.2, 801.4 c UL us, CSA Self-extinguishing By 6 screw terminals on back of the device 2 x 1.5 By yoke IP 66 -10+ 55 -20+ 70 100 ($ 500 V) 2000 V/50 Hz/1 min
mm2
C C M
4/10
# LCD display, 8 digits, digit height 7 mm # Powered by alkaline batteries or lithium battery # Counting inputs : solid state ($ 430 V) or voltage (up to $/" 240 V) # Dimensions DIN - 24 x 48 mm # Reset on front panel or external with inhibit facility
References
Totalising counters, LCD 24 x 48
Description
560812
RC 87 610 050
Accessories
Description Adaptors for panel cut-out Dimensions Reference Weight kg 0.002 0.008 0.011
25 x 50 mm (dimensions 29 x 54 mm) RC 26 546 829 45 x 45 mm (dimensions 52 x 52 mm) RC 26 546 830 50 mm (dimensions 73 mm) RC 26 546 831
Dimensions
RC 87 610 0/0
Panel cut-out (Max. thickness 10mm) 1 unit
+0,6
4
4 units
44,6 21,8
44,8 - 0
30
22 - 0
+0,3
24
48
64 3
RC 26 546 829
54 48 3,5
RC 26 546 830
52 48 8
20
RC 26 546 831
73 48 4,4 8,4
29
24
52
24
24
60
60
RC 87 610 050
1 2 3 4 5 6
12ms
Terminals 1 - Reset " 48240 V 2 - 0 V reset 3 - Reset "/$ 550 V 4 - "/$ 550 V 5-0V 6 - " 48240 V
Reset inputs
Start/stop inputs
4/11
Characteristics, schemes
Technical characteristics
Function Display Digit height Counting capacity mm Impulse counter 8 digit LCD 7 099 999 999
Input characteristics
Counter type Input type RC 87 610 240 1 counting input by volt-free contact or NPN or PNP open-collector transistor (terminals 3 - 4) 40 RC 87 610 250 1 galvanically isolated counting input
Terminals 4 - 5 Terminals 5 - 6
ms V V
Terminals 2 - 3 Terminals 1 - 2
Supply characteristics
1 lithium battery Life 5 years Supply can be switched off via Dipswitch n 3 located on the underside of the device
General characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Material Connection Clamping capacity Fixing Front panel degree of protection Temperatures Operation Storage (1) The reset is galvanically isolated from the counting input. VDE 0110, IEC 664, IEC 48, IEC 255.4, IEC 255.5, IEC 801.2, IEC 801.4 c UL us, CSA Self-extinguishing By 6 screw terminals on back of the device 2 x 1.5 By yoke IP 66 - 10+ 55 - 20+ 70
mm2
C C
RC 87 610 250
1 2 3 4 5 6
NC NC
Counting inputs
Terminals 1 - General reset input 2 - General reset common 3 - Count common 4 - Counting 5 - Not connected 6 - Not connected
Terminals 1 - Reset " 48240 V 2 - General reset common 3 - Reset "/$ 550 V 4 - "/$ 550 V 5 - Count common 6 - " 48240 V
4/12
References, dimensions
# Partial or total count display # Counting capacity : 5 partial : 0999 999 5 total : 099 999 999 # Counting inputs and reset inputs : 5 RC 87 610 240 : solid state 5 RC 87 610 250 : voltage # Decimal point # Integral module for voltage inputs (" / $ 550 V, " 48240 V) # Powered by lithium battery. Life : 5 years # Front panel reset for "partial" count # Front panel or electrical reset for total count # Accessories for panel cut-out 25 x 50, 45 x 45, 50
References
Total/partial impulse counters, LCD 24 x 48
Description
560813
Weight kg 0.060
RC 87 610 250
0.065
Accessories
Description Adaptors for panel cut-out Dimensions 25x50 mm (dimensions 29x54 mm) 45x45 mm (dimensions 52x52 mm) 50 mm (dimensions 73 mm) Reference RC 26 546 829 RC 26 546 830 RC 26 546 831 Weight kg 0.002 0.008 0.011
Dimensions
RC 87 610 2/0
Panel cut-out (Max. thickness 10mm) 1 unit
+0,6
4 units
44,6 21,8
44,8 - 0
30
22 - 0
+0,3
24
64
48
RC 26 546 829
54 48 3,5
RC 26 546 830
52 48 8
20
RC 26 546 831
73 48 4,4 8,4
29
24
52
24
24
60
60
4/13
Characteristics
Counter type
RC 87 610 340 Impulse counter Solid state 8 digit LCD 7 099 999 999
RC 87 610 440 Hour counter/chronometer Solid state 6 digit LCD 7 099 999.9 h 099 999.9 min 099 999.9 s 099 h 59 min 59 s Quartz (precision 50 ppm) Yes 5 years
Technical characteristics
Functions Solid state input Display Digit height Counting capacity Time ranges
mm
Time base Possibility of reloading current value Supply Life 1 lithium battery
8 years
Input characteristics
Volt-free contact 1 Start/Stop input 40 ms minimum (terminals 3-5) 1 Reset input 100 ms minimum (terminals 1-3) 1 Prog. input (terminals 3-4) 1 enable Reset input (terminals 1-2) Volt-free contact or transistor 100 minimum Front panel
T OFF T ON Current output Leakage current in OFF state Residual voltage NPN collector T OFF T ON Level 0 Level 1 Current consumption NPN open collector
Hz ms ms A A V kHz s s V V mA ms
40 max 12 min 12 min 52 max 0.2 max 0.4 max 7 max 70 min 70 min $ 01 $ 430 6 max at $ 24 V Volt-free contact or transistor 12 minimum Front panel
Operating characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Material Connection by screw terminals on back of the device Clamping capacity Fixing Degree of protection Temperature limits Operation Storage VDE 0110, IEC 664, 348, 255.4, 255.5, 801.2, 801.4 c UL us, CSA Self-extinguishing 5 terminals 2 x 1.5 By yoke IP 64 0+ 55 - 25+ 70
mm2
C C
4/14
# # 5 5 # 5 5
8 or 6 digits LCD display, digit height 7 mm Totalising counter: 7 kHz and 40 Hz inputs maximum counting capacity : 99 999 999 impulses Hour counter/chronometer: start/stop inputs 4 time ranges: - 99 999.9 hours - 99 999.9 min - 99 999.9 s - 99 h 59 min 59 s # Powered by lithium battery: 5 reset from front panel or remote reset
References
Totalising counters, LCD 24 x 48
Description
560814
Accessories
RC 87 610 340 Description Adaptors for panel cut-out Dimensions 25x50 mm (dimensions 29x54 mm) 45x45 mm (dimensions 52x52 mm) 50 mm (dimensions 73 mm) Reference RC 26 546 829 RC 26 546 830 RC 26 546 831 Weight kg 0.006 0.008 0.011
Dimensions
RC 87 610 /40
4 4 ,6
210
48
,3 37 3,2
RC 26 546 829
54 48 3,5
y ; ; y ; y ; y ; y ; y ; y ; y ; y ; y ;y y ;
Panel cut-out
22 - 0
+ 0,3
44,8 - 0
+ 0,5
30
21,8
24
RC 26 546 830
52 48
20
RC 26 546 831
73 48 4,4 8,4
29
24
52
24
24
60
60
Schemes
RC 87 610 340
1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3,1 4 In. L En.R Reset In. H 2 4 2108 2108 2108
Fast counting input Slow counting input and reset Enable Reset input
RC 87 610 440
1 2 3 4 5 1,4,5 3 2 1 Enable Prog. Reset Reset Start/Stop 100 ms 2108 H 2108 H
Start/Stop input Prog. Reset Enable Reset input
Terminals 1 - Reset input 2 - Enable Reset 3 - Slow counting 4 - OV 5 - Fast counting Characteristics : page 4/14
4/15
Characteristics
Technical characteristics
Function Display Digit height Time ranges mm Hour counter 6 digit LCD 7 099 999.9 h 099 999.9 min 099 999.9 s 099 h 59 min 59 s Quartz (precision 50 ppm) Yes
Input characteristics
Counter type Input type Voltage Minimum time closed Minimum impulse time Terminals 4 - 5 Terminals 5 - 6 " $ V V ms ms ms RC 87 610 140 1 start/stop input by volt-free contact or open-collector transistor (terminals 3-4) 40 RC 87 610 150 1 start/stop input " / $ 550 " 48240 - 50/60 Hz 50 35
Front panel External Minimum time closed Minimum impulse time Voltage
Terminals 2 - 3 Terminals 1 - 2
ms ms V V
Supply characteristics
1 lithium battery Life 5 years Supply can be switched off via Dipswitch n 1 located on the underside of the device
General characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Material Connection Clamping capacity Mounting method Front panel degree of protection Temperature limits Operation Storage (1) The reset is galvanically isolated from the counting input. VDE 0110, IEC 664, 348, 55.4, 255.5, 801.2, 801.4 c UL us, CSA Self-extinguishing By 6 screw terminals on back of the device 2 x 1.5 By yoke IP 66 -10+ 55 -20+ 70
mm2
C C
4/16
# Counting inputs and reset inputs : solid state or voltage # Integral module for voltage inputs(" or $ 550 V, " 48240 V) # 4 time ranges : 5 99 999.9 h - 99 999.9 min 5 99 999.9 s - 99 h 59 min 59 s # Possibility of reloading current value # Powered by lithium battery. Life 5 years # Reset on front panel or external with inhibit facility
References
Hour counters, LCD 24 x 48
Description
560815
Accessories
RC 87 610 150 Description Adaptors for panel cut-out Dimensions 25x50 mm (dimensions 29x54 mm) 45x45 mm (dimensions 52x52 mm) 50 mm (dimensions 73 mm) Reference RC 26 546 829 RC 26 546 830 RC 26 546 831 Weight kg 0.002 0.008 0.011
Dimensions
RC 87 610 1/0
Panel cut-out (Max. thickness 10 mm) 1 unit 4 units
44,6 21,8
44,8 - 0
+0,6
30
22 - 0
+0,3
24
48
RC 26 546 829
54 48
64
3
RC 26 546 830
52
20
RC 26 546 831
73
8
3,5
48
48 4,4 8,4
29
24
52
24
24
60
60
RC 87 610 150
Terminals 1 - Reset " 48240 V 2 - Reset common 3 - Reset "/$ 550 V 4 - "/$ 550 V 5 - Start/stop common 6 - " 48240 V
NC NC
Reset inputs
Start/stop inputs
A Reset inputs
B Start/stop inputs
4/17
Schemes
Connection schemes
RC 87 610 240 Fast counting input Counting and general reset input
Voltage
4-30V 3 4 +
Volt-free contact
2 1
NPN transistor or 3-wire NPN proximity sensor (1) (RC 87 610 240)
+ NPN
4-30V 3 4 2 1
OV
PNP transistor or 3-wire PNP proximity sensor (1) (RC 87 610 240)
+ PNP
4-30V 3 4 2 1
(1) For sensor with leakage current 0.1 mA. (2) R = 470 / 2 for a 2-wire sensor with leakage current 1.5 mA.
4/18
Schemes (continued)
Connection schemes
RC 87 610 040, RC 87 610 140 Fast counting input RC 87 610 040 Slow counting or reset input RC 87 610 040 Start/Stop or reset input RC 87 610 140
Voltage
4-30V
3 5
Volt-free contact
2 or 3 1 or 4
NPN transistor (RC 87 610 140) NPN transistor or 3-wire NPN proximity sensor (1) (RC 87 610 040)
4-30V + NPN 3 OV 5
RC 87 610 040
1 or 4 2 or 3 2 or 3
RC 87 610 140
1 or 4
PNP transistor (RC 87 610 140) PNP transistor or 3-wire PNP proximity sensor (1) (RC 87 610 040)
4-30V + PNP 5 3
4-30V 5 R (2) 3 OV
4-30V 5 R (2) OV 3
Counting input RC 87 610 050, RC 87 610 250 Start/Stop input RC 87 610 150
5-50V~/ 48-240V~ 4 5 6 4 5-50V~/= 48-240V~ 5 6 5-50V + PNP 4 5 + PNP
Voltage
48-240V~ 5-50V~/
Live contact
48-240V~ 5-50V~/
OV
5-50V 4 5 OV
30V
max R (2)
4 5 OV
30V
maxi 4 R (2) 5
OV
OV
(1) For sensor with leakage current 0.1 mA. (2) R = 470 / 2 for a 2-wire sensor with leakage current 1.5 mA. References : pages 4/11 to 4/17
4/19
Functions
Input modes
Input mode UP
1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DN
1 2 n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 n-5 n-6
IND
1 2 3 0 1 2 3 2 1 0 n 1 n-1
CUMUL
1 2 3 4 0 n 1 n-1 3 n-3 4 n-4 5 n-5 7. . . n - 7. . .
DIR
1 2 3 0 1 Up 2 3 DOWN 2 1 0 n Up 1 n-1
1 2 3 4
Input IN1 count in the direction of the cycle Input IN2 count in the opposite direction from the cycle Display (O...P) 2 channel up/down counters Display (P...O) 2 channel up/down counters
1 Input IN1 count in the direction of the cycle 2 Input IN2 count in the opposite direction from the cycle 3 Display (O...P) 2 channel up/down counters 4 Display (P...O) 2 channel up/down counters
1 2 3 4
Input IN1 input pulses Input IN2 reversal of counting direction Display (O...P) 1 channel up/down counters Display (P...O) 1 channel up/down counters
PH
1 2 3 =0 1 2 n-2 3 4 3 2
PH2
1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1
PH4
1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 =n n - 1
n - 3 n-4 n - 3 n - 2
1 2 3 4
Input IN1 (signals 90 out of phase) Input IN2 (signals 90 out of phase) Display (O...P) Display (P...O)
1 Input IN1 counts on rising and falling edges 2 Input IN2 direction of count reversed if IN2 in advance of IN1 3 Display (O...P) 4 Display (P...O)
1 Input IN1 counts on rising and falling edges 2 Input IN2 counts on rising and falling edges, direction of count reversed if IN2 in advance of IN1 3 Display (O...P) 4 Display (P...O)
Output modes
Single cycle 2 presets
PR 0 P2-----P1+1 P1 P1 P1-1 P1-2-------------- P1-1 P1 P1+1---PR 0 P2---------P1+1 P1 0 PR 0 1----- P1-1 ON OFF t t P1 P1-1 P1-2---P1+1 P1+2--P1 P1+1 P1+2 --------P1 P1-1 P1-2 --------ON OFF
0 PR 0 1----- P1-1
Maintained
Pulsed (transient pulse) (t = 0.19.9 s) Pulsed with auto Reset to value of P2 (or P for 1 preset) (t = 500 ms) t = 0.1 s to 9.9 s for multifunction
Repetitive cycle
PR 0 P2 P2-1 ----1 P2 P2-1 0 PR 0 1----- P2-1 0 1 -----------n n+1 ----- P2 P2+1 -----------n n-1 ----0 -1 ON OFF t
Example
Current counter
OUT 2 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345
Batch counter
OUT 1 Reset
On a packing line, bottles need to be counted into packs of 6 bottles and then despatched in a box containing a batch of 4 packs. P2 : current counter preset value : 00006 P1 : batch counter preset value : 00004
4/20
Functions (continued)
Tachometer function
Measurement principle Measurement begins on a rising edge of the signal to be measured. The measurement time is greater than TR, but less than TL. Measurement stops at the end of the current period (3) after TR.
Signal to be measured
2
Time TR
End of measurement
If the period (3) does not end before TL, the measurement result will be zero (0). The outputs are updated at the end of each measurement according to the selected output mode. # Maintained output : output active if the measured speed is greater than the preset speed. # Pulsed output : output activated during time T, when the preset threshold is crossed. Measurement accuracy : 100 + (200/TR) PPM Example : for TR = 1 s : 300 PPM (0.03 %).
Speed Speed
P2 P1
P1 P2
4
t
0
Out 1 (1) Out 2 Out 1 (2) Out 2
t
(1)
0
Out 1 Out 2 Out 1 (2) Out 2
Application example You wish to display a linear speed of 2.00 m/s for a drive pulley rotating at 300 rev/min. A sensor on this pulley delivers one pulse, per revolution, i.e. : Ns Coef RPX V = ------------------------------------------n Required display : V = 2.00 (result in m/s RPX = 1). Given that : n = 1 300 Ns = --------- = 5 60 200 1 Vn - Cf = ----------------- = 40 Dwhere Cf = -----------------------Ns RPX 51 In addition, the decimal point is positioned in the hundreds (xxxx.xx). Selection of TR : you wish the measurement to be updated every 2 seconds TR = 2 s. Select TL > TR, for example TL = 3 s. The tachometer function can also be used to calculate a flow rate.
1 Input IN1 2 Display (0...PR), 1 channel pulse measurement 3 Display (PR...0), 1 channel pulse measurement
PROG IN 1
1 Input IN1 2 Display (0...PR), 1 channel period measurement 3 Display (PR...0), 1 channel period measurement
PROG
IN 2
1 Input IN1 (start counting) 2 Input IN2 (stop counting) 3 Display (0...PR), measurement on 2 separate channels 4 Display (PR...0), measurement on 2 separate channels
4/21
Characteristics
Counter type
RC 87 618 /// Preselection up/down counters Counters, Batch counters, tachometers and chronometers 1 or 2 5 digits 5 digits 8 4 - 9999+ 99999 Yes
RC 87 619 ///
Technical characteristics
Functions Mulltifunction Number of presets Back-lit or red illuminated display Digit height Counters, Batch counters, totalising counters, tachometers and chronometers 6 digits 6 digits 10 6 Yes
mm mm
Input characteristics
Inputs Input modes (see page 4/20) Input by contact 2 counting inputs IN1, IN2 2 counting inputs IN1, IN2, 1 inhibit input UP, DN, DIR, IND, CUMUL PH, PH2, PH4 Voltage or solid state for 3-wire and Voltage or solid state (NPN/PNP 2-wire detection using external resistor depending on wiring) (NPN or PNP depending on wiring) 5 kHz or 30 Hz 5 kHz (2.5 kHz in phase x 4) 2.5 kHz PH4 30 Hz in debounce mode Counter Tachometer Counter Tachometer Totalising counter 7.5 9 7.5 9 6 7.5 9 7.5 9 6 4 5 4 5 3 3.5 1.5
Counting speed
Counters Mulltifunction
UP, DOWN, DIR IND, CUMUL (IN1, IN2 non simultaneous) IND, CUMUL (IN1, IN2 simultaneous) PH, PH2 PH4 Low level High level Impedance
Reset characteristics
Reset to zero or to preset value Front panel Electrical ms V V k If not protected in programming phase By contact, voltage or solid state (NPN or By contact, voltage or solid state (NPN or PNP depending on wiring) PNP) 5 $ 01 $ 430 10 Yes 00.00199.999 xxxxx, xxxx.x, xxx.xx, xx.xxx xxxxxx, xxxxx, x, xxxx, xx, xxx.xx, xx.xxxx $ 12 or 100 V Un- 2 V/100 mA In EEPROM memory
Minimum pulse time Low level High level Impedance Option to protect against reset from front panel Scale factor (each input pulse is multiplied by this figure) Decimal point selectable for ease of reading Sensor supply " version $ version Configuration and current value saved
4/22
Characteristics (continued)
Counter type
RC 87 618 ///
RC 87 619 ///
Output characteristics
Solid state outputs - Type - Maximum current - Maximum voltage - Voltage drop - Response time Relay outputs - Type - Rated current - Maximum voltage - Maximum breaking capacity (resistive) AC-1 - Minimum current - Response time - Mechanical life - Electrical life at I max. AC-1 - Output modes : maintained or pulsed (fixed or adjustable pulse duration)) - Single cycle or repetitive (immediate auto reset) Supply (min/max values) - Maximum consumption $ version " 50/60 Hz version mA V V s NPN open collector 100 $ 40 < 1.5 < 250 2 N/O contacts or 2 solid state depending on model 2 " 250 500 10 < 10 3 x 106 operating cycles 1 x 105 t = 0.19.9 s Yes $ 1030, " 2055, " 80260 4 10 10 10 10 95 % 02000 2.5 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Class A 1055 Hz / 0.35 mm Self-extinguishing Screw terminals 2 x 1.5 With bracket IP 54 Yes 0+ 55 - 25+ 70 c UL us, CSA 2 C/O contacts + 2 solid state
A V VA mA ms
V W VA ms ms ms m kV
<5 < 13
General characteristics
$ 1030 V version " 2055 V version " 80260 V version Relative humidity (without condensation) Altitude Insulation (IEC 664-1) Standards Conforming to IEC 1000.4.2 Conforming to IEC 1000.4.3 Conforming to IEC 1000.4.4 Conforming to IEC 1000.4.6 Conforming to IEC 55022/11 group 1 Vibration withstand on 3 axes conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Material Connection Clamping capacity Front panel fixing Front panel protection Front panel seal Temperature limits Operation Storage Product certifications Immunity to microbreaks
mm2
C C
4/23
Model RC 87 618
References
Preselection and multifunction up/down counters 48 x 48 Functions : counter, batch counter, tachometer, chronometer Counting input modes UP, DN, IND, CUMUL, DIR, PH, PH2, PH4 Time base : 99 h 59 min, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 s, 24 h 2 presets
Description
560816
Supply voltage
Reference RC 87 618 228 RC 87 618 268 RC 87 618 224 RC 87 618 264 RC 87 618 222 RC 87 618 262 RC 87 618 328 RC 87 618 368 RC 87 618 324 RC 87 618 364 RC 87 618 322 RC 87 618 362
Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
" 2055 V
560817
" 80260 V
4
RC 87 618 322
" 2055 V
$ 1030 V
Dimensions
Display Panel cut-out
48
RST
RST
11 114
48 45
45
+0.6 0
+0.6 0
1 Reset 2 Access to all parameters in Prog. mode 3 Incrementation of figures and multipliers selection of a parameter value
Connection schemes
RC 87 618 22/, RC 87 618 32/
Supply
4/24
Model RC 87 619
References
Preselection and multifunction up/down counters 72 x 72 Functions : counter, batch counter, tachometer, chronometer, totalising counter Counting input modes UP, DN, IND, CUMUL, DIR, PH, PH2, PH4 Time base : 99 h 59 min, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 s, 24 h, 999.99 h, 999.99 min. 2 presets
Description
560818
Supply voltage
Weight kg 0.290
" 2055 V
RC 87 619 224
0.290
RC 87 619 222
0.290
" 80260 V
RC 87 619 328
0.290
" 2055 V
RC 87 619 324
0.290
RC 87 619 322
0.290
Dimensions
Display Panel cut-out
72
P1 OUT1 P2 OUT2
P1
P2
RST
P1
P2
RST
10 112
72 68
+0.6 0
1 Reset 2/4 Access to all parameters in Prog. mode 3 Incrementation of figures and multipliers selection of a parameter value
Connection schemes
RC 87 619 22/, RC 87 619 32/
Supply
68
+0.6 0
4/25
5/0
Contents
Selection guide for measurement and control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2 # Relays model RM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6 # 3-phase supply control relays model RM4 T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/11 # Phase control relays, self-powered, model RM 84 873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/15 and 5/17 # Phase asymmetry control relays, self-powered, model RM 84 873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/19 and 5/23 # Phase sequence and loss of phase control relays, model RM 84 873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/21 # Voltage control relays for 3-phase supply, model RM 84 873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/25 # Voltage measurement relays, model RM4 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28 # Voltage control relays with memory, self-powered, model RM 84 872 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/33 # Voltage control relays, model RM 84 872 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/35 # Voltage-current control relays with display, models RM 84 872 and RM 84 871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/37 # Voltage control relays model RM4 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/41 # a.c. current control relays, model RM 84 871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/45 # Current measurement relays, model RM4 J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/48 # Current control relay, model RM 84 871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/53 # Liquid level control relays, low and high sensitivity, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/55 # Plug-in liquid level control relays, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/57 # Liquid level control relays, model RM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60 # Liquid level control relays, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/65 # Liquid level control relays with alarm, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/67 # Liquid level control relays, combined empty/fill functions, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/69 # Plug-in liquid level control relays, combined empty/fill functions, model RM 84 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/71 # Electrode holders and probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/72 # Underspeed control relays, model RM 84 874 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/75 # Motor load control relays, model RM 84 873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/77
5/1
Selection guide
Applications
Functions
Control : - rotational direction, - presence of phases, - undervoltage, - overvoltage and undervoltage - asymmetry of phases
2 C/O contacts 45 mm
Relay type
RM 84 873 211
Pages
5/25
5/25
5/2
Control : - overvoltage or undervoltage " 50 mV...5 V " 0.2...60 V " 1...100 V " 15...600 V " 30...500 V " 0.2...60 V " 15...600 V " or$ 20...80 V " or$ 65...260 V 1 or 2 C/O contacts 1 C/O contact 45 mm
3 mA...1 A
Control : overcurrent and undercurrent 3 mA...1 A 0.3...15 A 2...500 mA 2...500 mA 0.1...10 A 0.1...10 A 10...100 A with built-in TI
1 or 2 C/O contacts 45 mm
RM4 UA0// RM4 UA3/ RM 84 872 3// RM4 UB3/ RM 84 871 102 RM4 JA01/ RM4 JA31// RM4 JA32// RM 84 872 0// RM 84 871 0// RM 84 871 3//
5/28
5/35
5/37
5/41
5/45
5/48
5/53
5/37
5/3
Selection guide
(continued)
5
Applications
Functions
Control : - empty
Relay type
RM 84 870 1/1
Pages
5/55
5/4
Control : - underspeed
2 C/O contacts 45 mm
1 C/O contact
1 C/O contact 45 mm
RM 84 870 50/
RM 84 870 604
RM 84 874 30/
RM 84 873 40/
5/67
5/69
5/75
5/77
5/5
General characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications & marking IEC 60255-6, EN 60255-6 CSA, GL, UL, pending Zelio Control measurement relays conform to European regulations relating to & marking Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6, 10 to 55 Hz Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 Casing Terminals Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC Conforming to CSA Dielectric test Shock wave Power supply circuit Power supply circuit Power supply circuit In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 N.m V V kV kV C C - 40+ 85 - 20+ 65 1585 % Environmental class 3K3 a = 0.35 ms 15 gn - 11 ms IP 50 IP 20 3 III 500 (1) 2,5 4,8 0.851.1 Uc (2) 50/60 5 % > 0.1 Uc (2) Any position
Ambient air temperature around the device Permissible relative humidity range Vibration resistance Shock resistance Degree of protection
Frequency limits Disconnection value Mounting position without derating Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Tightening torque
5/6
General characteristics
(continued)
5
A A
Contact material
a.c. load Curve 1 Electrical durability of contacts on resistive load in millions of operating cycles
Millions of operating cycles
Curve 2 Reduction factor k for inductive loads (applies to values taken from durability Curve 1)
Reduction factor k
Voltage in V
10
1 0,9
300 200
100
3 2 1
0,1 0,4
50 40 30 20
5
0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 Current in A
0,01
0,3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Current broken in A 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 Power factor on breaking (cos ) 0,2
10 0,1
Example: An LC1-F185 contactor supplied with 115 V/50 Hz for a consumption of 55 VA or a current consumption equal to 0.5 A and cos = 0.3. For 0.5 A, curve 1 indicates a durability of approximately 1.5 million operating cycles. As the load is inductive, it is necessary to apply a reduction coefficient k to this number of cycles as indicated by curve 2. For cos = 0.3: k = 0.6 The electrical durability therefore becomes: 1.5 106 operating cycles x 0.6 = 900 000 operating cycles.
+
RM4
5/7
Presentation
Functions
These devices are designed to monitor 3-phase supplies and to protect motors and other loads against the faults listed in the table below. They have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
561011
RM4 TG Monitoring of rotational direction of phases Detection of complete failure of one or more of the phases Undervoltage detection Overvoltage and undervoltage detection (2 thresholds) Detection of phase asymmetry (imbalance) Function performed Function not performed
RM4 TU
RM4 TR
RM4 TA
RM4 T
Applications
# Control for connection of moving equipment (site equipment, agricultural equipment, refrigerated trucks). # Control for protection of persons and equipment against the consequences of reverse running (lifting, handling, elevators, escalators, etc.). # Control of sensitive 3-phase supplies. # Protection against the risk of a driving load (phase failure). # Normal/emergency power supply switching.
Presentation
RM4 TG RM4 TU R Yellow LED: indicates relay output state. <U Red LED: undervoltage fault. 1 Undervoltage setting potentiometer.
5
R
<U
1
R
RM4 TR33, RM4 TR34 1 Time delay function selector: Fault detection delayed Fault detection extended Potentiometer for setting time delay in seconds. Potentiometer for setting overvoltage as a direct value. Potentiometer for setting undervoltage as a direct value. Yellow LED: indicates relay output state. Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on. Red LED: overvoltage fault. Red LED: undervoltage fault. Red LED: phase failure or incorrect rotational direction of phases.
>U <U P R U
3 4 1 2
>U <U P R U
2 3
1 2
4 R U >U <U P
RM4 TA3
RM4 TA0 1 2 R U A P Asymmetry threshold setting potentiometer, from 5 to 15 %. Potentiometer for setting time delay, 0.1 to 10 s. Yellow LED: indicates relay output state. Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on. Red LED: phase asymmetry. Red LED: phase failure or incorrect rotational direction of phases.
A P R U
1
R
5/8
Presentation (continued)
Operating principle
The supply voltage to be monitored is connected to terminals L1, L2, L3 of the product. There is no need to provide a separate power supply for RM4 T relays, they are selfpowered by terminals L1, L2, L3. # Monitoring rotational direction of phases and detection of complete failure of one or more phases (RM4 T all models): 5 When terminals L1, L2, L3 are energised, the relay is energised and the yellow LED comes on if the rotational direction of phases is correct and if all 3 phases are present. 5 If one or more of the phases have failed or if the rotational direction is incorrect, the relay is not energised at switch-on. 5 In normal operation (no fault) the relay is energised; it de-energises instantaneously in the event of failure of one or more of the phases (any time delay set is not active on these faults). 5 In the event of failure or absence of a single phase, a voltage greater than the detection threshold ( 130 V on RM4 TG, undervoltage threshold setting on RM4 TU and RM4 TR) can be generated back through the control circuit, thus preventing detection of the phase failure. In this case, we recommend the use of RM4 TA relays. 5 The absence of a phase is signalled, on RM4 TR and RM4 TA, by illumination of LED P. # Overvoltage and undervoltage detection (RM4 TR): 5 In normal operation, the relay is energised and LEDs "U" and "R" are illuminated. 5 If the average of the 3 voltages between phases goes outside the range to be monitored, the output relay is de-energised: - overvoltage: the red LED > U illuminates, - undervoltage: the red LED < U illuminates. 5 When the supply returns towards its rated value, the relay is re-energised according to the hysteresis value (5 %) and the corresponding red LED goes out. 5 A selector switch allows selection of an adjustable time delay from 0.1 s to 10 s. With function transient "over" or "under" voltages are not taken into account. With function all variations above or below are taken into account and re-energisation of the relay is delayed. 5 In all cases, in order to be detected, the duration of the overvoltage or undervoltage must be greater than the measuring cycle time (80 ms). Function diagram (RM4 TR31, RM4 TR32)
RM4 TR31 RM4 TR32 Setting > U 0.95 x Setting > U
1.05 x Setting < U Setting < U UL1 L2 L3
<t
<t t t
0 Volt
Function
t
Function
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
t : time delay
<t
<t t
0 Volt
t
Function
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
t : time delay References : page 5/11 Characteristics : page 5/12 Dimensions, schemes : page 5/13
5/9
Presentation (continued)
Operating principle (continued) # Undervoltage detection only (RM4 TU) 5 In normal operation, the output relay is energised and the yellow LED is illuminated. 5 If the average of the 3 voltages between phases is less than the undervoltage threshold setting, the relay is de-energised after 550 ms and the red LED < U illuminates.
Function diagram
1.05 x Setting < U Setting < U UL1 L2 L3
<t t
0 volt
t : fixed time delay = 550 ms # Detection of phase asymmetry (RM4 TA) 5 In normal operation, the output relay is energised and the yellow and green LEDs are illuminated. 5 In the event of an asymmetry fault, after a time delay set between 0.1 s and 10 s (on RM4 TA3 only), the output relay is de-energised, the yellow LED goes out and red LED A illuminates (RM4 TA3/ only). 5 The relay re-energises when the asymmetry value measured is less than half of the asymmetry value setting (hysteresis). Function diagram
L1
L2
L3
L3 L2 L1 L3 L2 L1
15-18 15-16
Relay
25-28 25-26
t : time delay
Example : asymmetry set at 10 %, mains supply voltage 400 V - relay de-energisation threshold: 400 V 10 % = 360 V, 10 %, - relay re-energisation threshold: 400 V 10% = 380 V. 2
5/10
References
s Without
Width mm 22.5
Reference
Weight kg 0.110
RM4 TG20
RM4 TG20
RM4 TU01
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 TU02
0.110
561025
RM4 TR33
400 50/60 Hz
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 TR34
0.110
RM4 TR33
5
RM4 TR31
380500 50/60 Hz
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 TR32
0.110
Control threshold % Asymmetry 515 Asymmetry 515 Asymmetry 515 Asymmetry 515
Width mm 22.5
Reference
Weight kg 0.110
RM4 TA01
22.5
1 C/O
RM4 TA02
0.110
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 TA31
0.110
RM4 TA01
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 TA32
0.110
(1) Can be used on other supply voltages provided that the minimum operational voltages, maximum voltage between phases and compatibility with the control threshold ranges are complied with, see page 5/11.
5/11
Characteristics
Relay type
RM4 TG
RM4 TU
RM4 TR
RM4 TA
Energised during fault free operation. De-energised or unable to energise on detection of rotational direction fault or failure of one or more phases.
Energised during fault free operation. De-energised on detection of undervoltage or rotational direction fault or failure of one or more phases.
Energised during fault free operation. De-energised on detection of overvoltage, undervoltage or rotational direction fault or phase failure. 3%
3%
3%
10 %
10 %
10 %
0.5 %
0.5 %
0.5 %
0.07 % per degree 0.07 % per degree 0.07 % per degree centigrade centigrade centigrade
Hysteresis
Fixed
Measuring cycle
ms
80
580
(1) Minimum voltage required for operation of indicators and of the time delay.
5/12
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
RM4 T Rail mounting Screw fixing
78
80
22,5
89,5 82
Schemes
Terminal blocks RM4 TG20, TU0/
L1
L1 L2 L3
RM4 TA0/
L1 L2 15 L3
L2
15 (11)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
18
16
28 (24) 18 (14)
25 (21) 15 (11)
26 (22) 16 (12)
28 18
25 15
26
28
26 16
18
15
16
18
16
78
Supply to be monitored 1st C/O contact of the output relay 2nd C/O contact of the output relay
Supply to be monitored 1st C/O contact of the output relay 2nd C/O contact of the output relay
Application scheme
Example
1/L1 3/L2 4 5/L3 6
Q1 2 26 16
Stop Start
28
L3 L2 L1 RM4 T
25
Q2
15
18
Fault
KM1
5 6/T3
1 2/T1
3 4/T2
KM1 N
KM1 U1 2 V1 4 M1 3 W1 6
5/13
Functions
# Optimised installation and space savings (22.5 mm). # Control: the phase control relay can simply be installed and used to monitor phase failure or phase reversal, without any adjustment. # Safety: the level of safety of the installation can be selected by using versions with 1 or 2 C/O output contacts. # Self-powered : simple to install; uses the controlled mains supply for its own power supply.
Operating principle
These relays monitor the correct sequencing of phases L1, L2 and L3, as well as the total loss of one of these phases. When the phase sequence is correct, the output relay is energised; this is indicated by a yellow LED. The relay de-energises (LED off) if one of the following faults occurs: - incorrect sequence of phases at terminals L1, L2 and L3, - total loss of one phase or of all three phases (phase failure detection threshold < " 50 V).
Timing diagrams
RM 84 873 299
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Relay
RM 84 873 004
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Relay Relay
5/14
References
Phase control relays
Outputs
560997
1 C/O
Weight kg 0.100
2 C/O
RM 84 873 004
0.100
RM 84 873 004
Input characteristics
Supply voltage Operating range Frequency Maximum consumption V V VA 3 x " 230400 self-powered 200500 50/60 Hz +/- 1 Hz 25
Output characteristics
Output relay Rated current Maximum switching voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Pick-up delay Drop-out delay A V VA mA Cadmium-free 8 " 250 / " 440 2000 10/ 5 V AC-12 : 105 operating cycles at 8 A/ " 250 V 2 x 107 operating cycles < 200 < 300 in the event of loss of one phase
t1 t2
ms ms
Other characteristics
Creepage distance and clearance Clamping capacity Tightening torque Temperature limits Enclosure material Protection class Dielectric strength Product certifications Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Without cable end With cable end Operation Storage Terminal block Enclosure Conforming to IEC 255-5 kV mm2 mm2 Nm C C 4kV/3 2 x 2.5 1 x 4 or 2 x 1.5 1 (M3 screw/IEC 947-1) - 20+ 50 - 30+ 70 Self-extinguishing PC IP 20 IP 40 2.5 kV/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz c UL us, CSA
Dimensions
4,2
78,5
89,7
72 100
22,5
99,3
57
5/15
Functions, schemes
# Control: 5 phase sequence, 5 phase failure, 5 voltage drop on one or more phases. # Regeneration rate 90 % of Un. # Power supply: 3 x " 230 V and 3 x " 400 V. # Dual frequency: 50 and 60 Hz. # Indication of phase presence and relay state by yellow LED. # Relay output : 2 C/O contacts, 8A.
Operating principle
This relay monitors the correct sequencing of phases L1, L2 and L3, as well as a regeneration rate equal to 90% (-10 % of Un). When the phase sequence is correct, the output relay is energised; this is indicated by a yellow LED. The relay de-energises (LED off) if one of the following faults occurs: - incorrect sequence of phases at terminals L1, L2 and L3, - voltage drop on one or more phases.
Timing diagrams
100%
Phase L1
0% 100%
Phase L2
0% 100%
Phase L3
0% T3 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
11-14/21-24
Relay
11-12/21-22
Connection scheme
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 R
22 21 24 12 11 14
5/16
References
Phase control relays
560998
Weight kg 0.120
" 400 V
RM 84 873 512
0.120
RM 84 873 511
Input characteristics
Supply voltage Operating range Frequency Maximum consumption V 3 x " 230 and 3 x " 400 self-powered - 20+ 15 % Un 50-60 Hz +/- 1 Hz 17 at Un/50 Hz (20 at 60 Hz) 23 at Un + 15 %/50 Hz (27 at 60 Hz)
VA VA
Output characteristics
Output type Rated current Maximum switching voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Time to onset of fault t2 Time to disappearance of fault t1 Clamping capacity Without cable end With cable end A VA mA 2 cadmium-free C/O contacts 8 " 250 V/ " 440 V 2000 100/12 V AC-12 : 105 operating cycles at 8 A/ " 250 V 2 x 107 operating cycles < 200 < 200 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5
ms ms mm2 mm2
Other characteristics
Tightening torque Temperature limits Relative humidity Enclosure material Protection class Dielectric strength Creepage distance and clearance Insulation coordination Vibration Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Product certifications Operation Storage Nm C C 1 (M3 screw/IEC 947-1) - 20+ 50 - 40+ 70 95 % max without condensation Self-extinguishing PC IP 20 IP 40 2.5/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz 4kV/3 Overvoltage category III; degree of pollution 3; 4 kV/3 0.35 peak 1055 c UL us, CSA
Terminal block Enclosure Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Amplitude Frequency
kV kV
mm Hz
Dimensions
32 3,5 63 22,5
A1 15 Y1
57
78
18 16 A2
95 5
Functions : page 5/16 Schemes : page 5/16
5/17
Functions, schemes
# Control: 5 phase imbalance (asymmetry), 5 phase sequence, 5 phase failure, 5 voltage drop on one or more phases. # Asymmetry rate can be adjusted on the front panel, from - 5 % to - 15 % of Un. # Power supply: 3 x " 230 V and 3 x " 400 V. # Dual frequency: 50 and 60 Hz. # Indication of phase presence and relay state by yellow LED. # Relay output: 2 C/O contacts, 8A.
Operating principle
These relays monitor the correct sequencing of phases L1, L2 and L3, as well as a regeneration rate of - 5 % to - 15 % of Un. When the phase sequence is correct, the output relay is energised; this is indicated by a yellow LED. The relay de-energises (LED off) if one of the following faults occurs: - incorrect sequence of phases at terminals L1, L2 and L3, - voltage drop on one or more phases.
Timing diagrams
100%
Phase L1
0% 100%
Phase L2
0% 100%
Phase L3
0% T3 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
11-14/21-24
Relay
11-12/21-22
Connection scheme
L1 L2 L3
5
L1 L2 L3 R
22 21 24 12 11 14
5/18
References
Phase asymmetry control relays
Voltage
560999
" 230 V
Weight kg 0.120
" 400 V
RM 84 873 502
0.120
RM 84 873 501
Input characteristics
Supply voltage Operating range Frequency Maximum consumption V 3 x " 230 and 3 x " 400 self-powered - 20+ 15 % Un 50-60 Hz +/- 1 Hz 17 at Un/ 50 Hz (20 at 60 Hz) 23 at Un + 15 %/50 Hz (27 at 60 Hz)
VA VA
Output characteristics
Output type Rated current Maximum switching voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Time to onset of fault t2 Time to disappearance of fault t1 Clamping capacity Without cable end With cable end A VA mA 2 cadmium-free C/O contacts 8 " 250 V/" 440 V 2000 100/12 V AC-12 : 105 operating cycles at 8 A/" 250 V 2 x 107 operating cycles < 200 < 200 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5
ms ms mm2 mm2
Other characteristics
Tightening torque Temperature limits Relative humidity Enclosure material Protection class Dielectric strength Creepage distance and clearance Vibration Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Product certifications Operation Storage Nm C C 1 (M3 screw/IEC 947-1) - 20+ 50 - 40+ 70 95 % max without condensation Self-extinguishing PC IP 20 IP 40 2.5/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz 4kV/3 0.35 peak 1055 c UL us, CSA
Terminal block Enclosure Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Amplitude Frequency
kV kV mm Hz
Dimensions
32 3,5 63 22,5
A1 15 Y1
57
78
18 16 A2
95 5
5/19
Functions, dimensions
# Control: 5 phase sequence, 5 loss of one or more phases, 5 undervoltage. # Senses its own supply voltage. # Potentiometer for adjustment of mains power. # Time delay in the event of a fault adjustable : 0.2 to 10 s. # Relay output: 2 C/O contacts, 8 A. # Power-on and relay state indication by 2 LEDs.
Operating principle
On a 3-phase supply, this relay simultaneously monitors phase sequence, loss of a phase with a maximum regeneration rate of 70 % of the voltage indicated by a potentiometer on the front panel and symmetrical voltage drop on the 3 phases of less than 20 % of the preset value. When the 3 phases are in sequence, the output relay is energised and this is indicated by a yellow LED. The output relay de-energises (LED off) after a time delay T, adjustable between 0.2 and 10 s on the front panel, if one of the following faults occurs: - reversed direction of phase rotation, - absence of one or more phases, - voltage drop.
W (L3) R1/R2 T
Note : Time delay T is not operational during loss of L1 and L2. It operates during loss of L3, phase inversion or voltage drop. Its purpose is to avoid spurious triggering of the output relays during transient states, notably during motor starting.
Dimensions
3,6 23 77 5 4,2
78,5
89,7
45
100
5/20
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Phase sequence and loss of phase control relays
Voltage
561000
3 x " 230 V 3 x " 400 V 3 x " 480 V 3 x " 575 V RM 84 873 010
Setting range V " 180260 " 320460 " 380550 " 460660
Weight kg 0.350
RM 84 873 012
0.350
RM 84 873 015
0.350
RM 84 873 016
0.350
Technical characteristics
Supply Operating range Frequency Maximum consumption Immunity to microbreaks Delay on pick-up Creepage distance and clearance Hz VA ms ms kV Self-powered, terminals L1-L2 0.71.2 x Un 50/60 6 10 500 4kV/3
Input characteristics
Measurement input resistance Regeneration rate Undervoltage detection (symmetrical drop) Threshold setting accuracy k 1 at Un max. 70 % of the threshold setting " 20 % of the threshold setting 10 %
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life A mA V 2 C/O contacts, AgCdO " 2000 VA, $ 80 W "/$ 8 "/$ 100 "/$ 250 2000 VA - 105 operating cycles Cos = 0.3 - 6000 operating cycles L/R = 300 ms - 6000 operating cycles 0.210 Max : 1015
Other characteristics
Indication Enclosure Terminals Power on Relay Without cable end With cable end Tightening torque Operation Storage Amplitude Frequency Conforming to IEC 60664-1 mm2 mm2 Nm C C mm Hz M kV Green LED Yellow LED Self-extinguishing PC 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 0.6 max - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 93 % without condensation 0.35 1055 > 100 at 500 V 3 at 1 mA for 1 minute/50 Hz c UL us, CSA
Temperature limits Relative humidity Vibration Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Product certifications
5/21
Functions, dimensions
# Control: 5 phase imbalance (asymmetry), 5 phase sequence, 5 disconnection of one or more phases with regenerated voltage equivalent to 95 % of Un. # Asymmetry rate adjustable on front panel (5 % to 20 %). # 3-phase power supply: 3 x " 230 V and 3 x 400 V ". # Dual frequency : 50 and 60 Hz. # Indication of phase presence and relay state by 2 LEDs. # Time delay in the event of a fault adjustable from 0.5 to 10 seconds. # Relay output: 5 1 C/O contact, 8 A, 5 2 C/O contacts, 8 A,
Operating principle
The device is self-powered by two phases. A green LED indicates that the power supply is ON. When the phase sequence is correct and the asymmetry rate is lower than the threshold indicated on the front panel, the output relay is energised; this is indicated by a yellow LED (lit). The output relay de-energises after a delay T1, adjustable on the front panel, if one of the following faults is present: - incorrect phase sequence, - absence of L3, - asymmetry rate higher than the threshold setting. This imbalance represents the increase or decrease in the voltage of two phases compared to the voltage of a different phase. The output relay de-energises instantaneously in the event of a break on L1 or L2. A hysteresis fixed at about 10 % ensures bounce-free relay switching around the threshold. As differential measurement is used, the relay does not react to symmetrical increases or decreases in the mains supply.
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3
5
T1: Delay after a fault T2: Delay on power-down T3: Delay on power-up.
Hysteresis
0% T3
R1/R2 Output relay ON (yellow LED) OFF
T1
T2 T3 T2 T3
T1
T3
T2
Dimensions
3,6 23 77 5 4,2
78,5
89,7
45
100
5/22
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Phase asymmetry control relays, self-powered
Number of relays
561001
Supply voltages measured 3 x " 230 V 3 x " 400 V 3 x " 230 V 3 x " 400 V
Weight kg 0.360
RM 84 873 301
0.360
RM 84 873 310
0.360
RM 84 873 311
0.360
RM 84 873 300
Hz VA ms s kV
Input characteristics
Rated voltage Operating range Frequency (can be altered via switch beneath the device) Regeneration rate Asymmetry rate adjustment Threshold setting accuracy Conforming to VDE 0435 Temperature drift Repeat accuracy Fixed hysteresis 3-phase supply V V Hz 3 x " 230, 3 x " 400 " 185275, " 320480 50-60 max 95 % of Un 520 % of Un 20 % at full scale 0.1 %/ C 1 % at full scale 10 % of the threshold setting Volt-free C/O contact, AgCdO " 2000 VA, $ 80 W "/$ 8 "/$ 100 "/$ 250 2000 VA - 105 operating cycles Cos = 0.3 - 6000 operating cycles L/R = 300 ms - 6000 operating cycles 5 x 106 operating cycles 0.510, Max : 1016 Green LED Yellow LED IP 20 IP 30 Self-extinguishing PC, panel or DIN rail mounted 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 0.6 max (M3 screw/IEC 947-1) - 20+ 60 (conforming to IEC 68-2-14) - 30+ 70 (conforming to IEC 68-2-1/2) 93 % without condensation 0.35 1055 > 100 at $ 500 V 2.5/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz 5/wave 1.2 - 50 s c UL us, CSA, RM 84 873 30/ : GL
Output characteristics
Output type Breaking capacity Maximum breaking current Minimum breaking current Maximum switching voltage Electrical life V mA V AC-12 AC-15 DC-13
Mechanical life
Other characteristics
Time delay in the event of fault t1 : Indication Supply Relay Protection class Terminal block Enclosure Enclosure Terminal block clamping Without cable end capacity With cable end Tightening torque Temperature limits Operation Storage Relative humidity Conforming to IEC 68-2-30 Vibrations Amplitude (conforming to IEC 68-2-6) Frequency Insulation resistance Conforming to IEC 255-5 Dielectric strength Conforming to IEC 255-5 Impulse voltage Conforming to IEC 255-5/664-1 Product certifications s
mm2 mm2 Nm C C mm Hz m kV kV
5/23
Functions, dimensions
# Controls overvoltage and undervoltage on its own power supply (window type). # RM 84 873 201: phase to phase / RM 84 873 211: between phase and neutral. # Minimum and maximum thresholds can be adjusted separately. # Absence of neutral detected on relay RM 84 873 211. # Delay on crossing the upper or lower threshold, adjustable between 0.1 and 10 seconds on the front panel of the device. # Overvoltage and undervoltage indicated by 2 yellow LEDs. # Power on indicated by 1 green LED. # 2 output relays: upper and lower threshold. # 2 separate time delays.
Operating principle
The two relays are energised when the measured voltages are between the minimum and maximum thresholds, which can be adjusted separately via two potentiometers on the front panel of the device. If one or more voltages go outside the window between the two thresholds, the relay corresponding to the fault de-energises following a delay which can be adjusted on the front panel. Each relay can have its own individual time delay (0.1 to 10 s). A hysteresis fixed at 3 % ensures bounce-free relay switching when the voltage levels return to a value between the upper and lower thresholds. The device is not affected by the phase sequence, or by harmonic distortion. A green LED indicates that the power supply is ON. Two yellow LEDs indicate when the upper and lower thresholds have been exceeded. They are lit when the voltages are within the set window.
0 R2 R1 T1 Tr T2 T1
Dimensions
3,6 23 77 5 4,2
78,5
89,7
45
100
5/24
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Voltage control relays for 3-phase supply
Power supplies measured
561002
" 3 x 400 V
Weight kg 0.310
RM 84 873 211
0.310
RM 84 873 211
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Un on terminals L1-L2 Maximum power Immunity to microbreaks Delay on pick-up Creepage distance and clearance V VA ms s kV " 400, 30 % (50/60 Hz) 4 at Un 8 at Un + 20 % 10 About 3 4kV/3
Other characteristics
Delay on crossing the threshold Indication Supply Overvoltage relay Undervoltage relay Protection class Terminal block Conforming to IEC 529-5 Enclosure Enclosure Terminal capacity With cable end Without cable end Tightening torque Conforming to IEC 947-1 Temperature limits Operation Storage Relative humidity Conforming to IEC 68-2-30 Vibrations Amplitude Conforming to IEC 682-6 Frequency Insulation resistance Conforming to IEC 255-5 Dielectric strength Conforming to IEC 255-5 Impulse voltage Conforming to IEC 255-5/664-1 Product certifications
mm2 mm2 Nm C C mm Hz M kV kV
5/25
Presentation
Functions
561046
These devices are designed to detect when voltage rises above or drops below a preset threshold, on an a.c. or a d.c. supply. They have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
Relay type Voltage control Overvoltage or undervoltage detection (1) No Yes Measuring range
RM4 UA01
Yes Yes
50 mV500 V 50 mV500 V
Applications : - d.c. motor overspeed control, - battery monitoring, - monitoring of a.c. or d.c. supplies, - speed monitoring (with tacho-generator).
Presentation
RM4 UA0/ Width 22.5 mm RM4 UA3/ Width 22.5 mm
1 2
R U R U
1 2 3 4
5
1 Adjustment of voltage threshold as % of setting range max. value. 2 Hysteresis adjustment from 5 to 30 % (2). 3 Fine adjustment of time delay as % of setting range max. value. 4 Switch combining: - selection of the timing range: 1s, 3s, 10s, 30s, no time delay, - selection of overvoltage (>) or undervoltage (<) detection. See table below. R Yellow LED: indicates relay state. U Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on.
Table showing details for switch 4 Switch position Function <0 Undervoltage control <1 Undervoltage control <3 Undervoltage control < 10 Undervoltage control < 30 Undervoltage control >0 Overvoltage control >1 Overvoltage control >3 Overvoltage control > 10 Overvoltage control > 30 Overvoltage control
Time delay (t) No time delay 0.05 to 1 s 0.15 to 3 s 0.5 to 10 s 1.5 to 30 s No time delay 0.05 to 1 s 0.15 to 3 s 0.5 to 10 s 1.5 to 30 s
(1) Selection by switch on front face. (2) Value of voltage difference between energisation and de-energisation of the output relay (% of the voltage threshold to be measured).
5/26
Presentation (continued)
Operating principle
The supply voltage is connected to terminals A1-A2. The voltage to be monitored is connected to terminals B1, B2 or B3 and C. Hysteresis is adjustable between 5 and 30%: for overvoltage h = (US1 - US2) / US1, for undervoltage h = (US2 - US1) / US1. A measuring cycle lasts only 80 ms, which allows rapid detection of changes in voltage. Relay set for overvoltage detection (RM4 UA0/ or selector on > for model RM4 UA3/) : If the voltage is > the setting threshold US1, the output relay is energised with or without a time delay. When the voltage returns to a value US2 below the threshold, depending on the hysteresis setting, the relay is instantaneously de-energised. Relay set for undervoltage detection (selector on <, model RM4 UA3/ only): If the voltage is < the setting threshold US1, the output relay is energised with or without a time delay. When the voltage returns to a value US2 above the threshold, depending on the hysteresis setting, the relay is de-energised. Function diagrams Overvoltage control
Function > U supply A1-A2 Voltage US1 measured US2 Relay 15-18
15-16 25-28 25-26
5
t <t
t : time delay
Undervoltage control
Function < U supply A1-A2 Voltage US2 measured US1 Relay
15-18 15-16 25-28 25-26
<t
t : time delay
Note: the measurement ranges can be extended above 500 V by adding a resistor, see page 5/31. The measurement range on " supply can be extended by means of a voltage transformer, the secondary of which is connected to the measuring terminals of the corresponding RM4.
5/27
References
Time delay
Without
Width
Output relay
Weight
mm 22.5
1 C/O
RM4 UA01/
kg 0.168
RM4 UA01
22.5
1 C/O
RM4 UA02/
0.168
30...300 50500
22.5
1 C/O
RM4 UA03/
0.168
s 0.05...30
mm 22.5
2 C/O
RM4 UA31//
kg 0.168
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 UA32//
0.168
30...300 50500 (1) Standard supply voltages RM4 UA0/ Volts " 50/60 Hz RM4 UA3/ Volts " 50/60 Hz $
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 UA33//
0.168
24 B 24...240 MW MW
110...130 F 110...130 F
220...240 M 220...240 M
380...415 Q
5/28
Characteristics
Average consumption at Un
Setting accuracy of the switching threshold Switching threshold drift % % Hysteresis (adjustable) Setting accuracy of the time delay Time delay drift % %
As % of the full-scale value: 5 % 0.06 per degree centigrade, depending on the permissible ambient temperature 0.5, within the supply voltage range (0.851.1 Un) 530 of the voltage threshold setting As % of the full-scale value: 10 % 0.5, within the supply voltage range (0.851.1 Un) 0.07 per degree centigrade, depending on rated operating temperature
Measuring cycle
ms
80
5/29
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
Dimensions RM4 UA Rail mounting Screw fixing
78
80
22,5
89,5 82
Schemes
Terminal blocks RM4 UA01, UA02
A1 B1
B1 B2
RM4 UA03
C B3
15
RM4 UA33
C B3
15 25
A2 B2
B3
A1
B2
C B3
15
A1 B1
B1 B2 B3
A2 B2
A1
B2 B3
A2 B2
15
C B3
25
C
16 18
C
16 18
C
16 18 26 A1 A2 28
C
16 18 26 28
A1
A2
A1
A1
A2
18
16
15
18
16
15
28 18
26 16
25 15
28 18
A2
26 16
25 15
Connection and current values to be measured, depending on type of RM4 UA RM4 UA/1 B1-C 0.050.5 V RM4 UA/2 B1-C 110 V B2-C 0.33 V B2-C 550 V B3-C 0.55 V B3-C 10100 V
RM4 UA/3
B2-C B3-C
30300 V 50500 V
Application scheme
Example: overspeed monitoring (undervoltage function)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Q1 2 4 6 26 28 16 A1 A2 RM4 UA
Stop
18
2 Q3 1 2 Q2 1
1 Q4 2
B1 C
U v
Tacho-generator
25
KM1 2 4 W1 6
U1
V1
Overspeed
Start
15
KM1
M1 3
KM1
5/30
6 4
78
Setting-up
Example of undervoltage to be measured Undervoltage threshold to be measured: 12 V $. Output relay time delay: 20 s. Reset voltage threshold: 13.2 V Supply voltage: 230 V " 60 Hz. Product selected RM4 UA32M Connection of voltage to be measured B2-C (5 to 50 V)
1 2 3 4
R U
# Adjustments: 5 Adjustment of function and timing range, switch 4: - determine the timing range, immediately greater than the time required; in the above example 30 s, - determine whether overvoltage or undervoltage detection is required; in this example, undervoltage, - position switch 4 according to the above 2 criteria; in this example, switch 4 on < 30. 5 Fine adjustment of time delay: Depending on the max. range setting displayed at 4 (in the above example: 30 s) use potentiometer 3 to set the required time delay as a % of value 4. In the above example, the required time = 20 s therefore :
t x 100 20 x 100 = 66 % = 4 30
5 Set the voltage threshold setting potentiometer 1 as a percentage of the maximum value of the measuring range selected when wiring. In the above example: wiring B2-C, max. value of measuring range = 50 V, therefore: Setting 1 =
12 x 100 = 24 % 50
Simply connect an additional resistor (Rs) in series with the measuring input B3 or C. If the value of Rs is in the region of:
Rs = Ri U -1 where: Um Ri Internal resistance of input B3-C. Um Maximum value of threshold setting range. U Voltage threshold to be measured.
Ri
The tripping threshold of the relay will be towards the maximum graduation on the threshold setting potentiometer. In general, the power consumed by the resistor does not exceed 0.5 W. For a.c. voltages, it is also possible to use a voltage transformer. Supply by the measured voltage For monitoring mains and power supplies, the RM4 UA can be supplied by the voltage to be controlled, provided that: - the measurement threshold is within the operating B2/B3 range of the product's power supply (0.851.1 Uc), RM4 UA - variations of the voltage to be measured are C compatible with the supply and measurement voltage ranges.
A2 A1
5/31
Functions, dimensions
# Simple to install, these threshold relays check their own supply voltage level. # RM4 84 872 04/ : Select Overvoltage or Undervoltage" mode and the memory function by means of dip switches, then set the delay on crossing threshold T1. # RM4 84 872 05/ : set the required high and low voltage thresholds and the delay on crossing threshold T1.
Operating principle
Overvoltage-undervoltage control with memory Two operating modes are available :
# a.c. / d.c. voltage control without memory, # a.c. / d.c. voltage control with memory (see previous page).
Without fault memory With fault memory
U supply
Overload function
Threshold
T1
Relay
T1
Hysteresis
Underload function
Threshold Relay
T1
T1
Hysteresis
Threshold without memory The window threshold relay controls an electrical voltage which acts as its own power supply (simplified wiring). When the value of the controlled voltage, a.c. or d.c., goes outside the window, the output relay de-energises at the end of a time delay T1 which can be set on the front panel between 0.1 and 3 s. It re-energises when the voltage returns within the window and stays between the upper and lower thresholds displayed by two potentiometers on the front panel. A fixed hysteresis ensures bounce-free relay switching around the thresholds.
Note : time delay T1 on crossing the upper and lower thresholds provides immunity to transients, so preventing spurious triggering of the output relay.
U Meas. input Thres -hold Relay Meas. input Thres -hold Relay
Overload function
T1 T2
Hysteresis
Underload function
T2
T1
Hysteresis
Dimensions
4,2
78,5
89,7
72 100
22,5
99,3
Schemes : pages 5/80 and 5/81
57
5/32
References, characteristics
References
Type
561465
Voltage to be measured " or $ 2080 V " or $ 65260 V " or $ 2080 V " or $ 65260 V
With memory
Without memory
0.100 0.100
RM 84 872 0//
Supply characteristics
Relay type Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum consumption V V VA VA W W RM 84 872 04/ " or $ 2080, " or $ 65260 15150, 50275 6,7 2 2 0.8 1 cadmium-free C/O contact 8 " 250 " 440 2000 100 at $ 12 V 105 operating cycles at 8 A at " 250 V 2 x 107 operating cycles 0.13 10 % 500 RM 84 872 05/
6 2 2 0.8
Output characteristics
Output relay Rated current Switching current Maximum voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Time delay Delay on pick-up A V V VA mA AC-12 On crossing the threshold T1 s ms
Input characteristics
Relay type Measurement range Frequency of the signal measured Hysteresis Threshold setting accuracy Repeat accuracy With constant parameters Temperature drift V Hz Measures its own supply voltage 2080 or 65260 depending on model 5060 1 Adjustable 520 % 10 % 0.3 % 0.5 % per C
Fixed 5 %
Other characteristics
Temperature Relative humidity Enclosure material Degree of protection Connection Operation Storage Without condensation Conforming to IEC 60529 Flexible cable w/o cable end Flexible cable with cable end C C - 20+ 50 - 40+ 70 95 % Self-extinguishing Enclosure : IP 40D, terminal block : IP 20 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 1 2.5 kV for 1 min at 1 mA 50 Hz 4 kV/3 a = 0.35 mm
Tightening torque Dielectric strength Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Creepage distance and clearance Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
5/33
# Space savings, accurate measurement and optimised functions to improve the safety of your electrical installation. # These relays allow you to ensure that your equipment is working under correct conditions, by checking their supply voltage. # Control: select "Overvoltage" or "Undervoltage" mode by means of a dip switch. # Safety: in the same way, choose whether or not to activate the fault memory function and the delay on threshold crossing. # Accuracy: 2 products for greater measuring accuracy, provided by a microprocessor.
Operating principle
Control of a.c. / d.c. voltage without memory When the value of the controlled voltage, a.c. or d.c., reaches the threshold Ue displayed on the front panel, the output relay changes state at the end of a time delay T1, which can be set on the front panel to between 0.1 and 3 s. As soon as the voltage drops below 5 to 50% of the threshold (hysteresis), the output relay instantly changes state again. Changing the hysteresis on the front panel does not therefore modify the value of the preset threshold.
Control of a.c. / d.c. voltage with memory When the value of the controlled voltage, a.c. or d.c., reaches the Ue threshold displayed on the front panel, the output relay changes state at the end of a time delay T1, which can be set on the front panel to between 0.1 and 3 s, and remains latched in this position.
Without fault memory With fault memory
T1 T2
Relay Meas. input Threshold
T1
T2
Hysteresis
Underload function
T2
Relay
T1
T1
T2
Hysteresis
5
Connection schemes
U (+) A1 E1 (+) E2 E3 (+) (+) 11
(-)
A2
M (-)
12
14
A1 - A2 : Supply
Dimensions
4,2
89,7
5/34
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Measurement range
561467
Reference RM 84 872 021 RM 84 872 023 RM 84 872 024 RM 84 872 031 RM 84 872 033 RM 84 872 034
0.260 V
15600 V
RM 84 872 03/
" 230 V
Output characteristics
Output relay Rated current Switching voltage Maximum voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Time delay Delay on pick-up A V V VA mA AC-12 On crossing threshold T1 On crossing threshold T2 s s ms
5
15600
Input characteristics
Measurement range Frequency of the measured signal Adjustable hysteresis Threshold value Threshold setting accuracy Measurement ranges Inputs Sensitivity Input resistance V Hz 0.260 40500 550 % of the threshold setting 10100 % of the range 10 % E1-M E2-M E3-M 0.22 110 660 2 10 60
V k
Other characteristics
Temperature Relative humidity Enclosure material Degree of protection Connection Operation Storage Without condensation Conforming to IEC 60529 Flexible cable w/o cable end Flexible cable with cable end C C - 20+ 50 - 40+ 70 95 % Self-extinguishing Enclosure: IP 40D, terminal block: IP 20 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 1 2.5 kV for 1 min at 1 mA 50 Hz 4 kV/3 a = 0.035 mm
Tightening torque Dielectric strength Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Creepage distance and clearance Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
5/35
Functions
# Displays the actual value and the preset value on the LCD display. # Controls a.c. and d.c. signals (automatic detection). # Overload or underload modes can be selected. # Threshold and hysteresis can be adjusted separately. # Memory function in the event of a fault. # Delay on crossing the threshold.
Operating principle
These devices are designed to control an a.c. or d.c. electric signal. The threshold and hysteresis can be adjusted separately via two potentiometers on the front panel of the device. Before powering up the device, the operating mode must be selected by means of two dip-switches on the underside of the device (with/ without memory, over/under value). The mode is validated when power is applied to terminals A1 - A2. The signal to be monitored is connected between terminals E1, E2 or E3 (depending on the range) and terminal M.
When the value of the controlled signal, a.c. or d.c., reaches the threshold set on the front panel, the output relay opens (failsafe) at the end of time delay T. It closes immediately when the signal goes below (or above in under value mode) the threshold minus hysteresis (plus hysteresis in under value mode).
Memory
U Threshold
Hysteresis
When the threshold is reached, the output relay opens at the end of time delay T and remains in that position. To reset the relay, the power supply must be switched off. This operating mode enables the detection of over or under values of short duration. Notes The threshold crossing time delay T, which can be adjusted on the front panel from 0.1 to 3 seconds, ensures immunity to transients and other interference, thus preventing spurious triggering of the output relay.
Funct. R Overload
Memory Memory
In under value mode, the absolute value of the hysteresis cannot be more than the maximum of the measurement range.
Programming - display
Normal mode In this mode, the device displays the value of the measured signal, its form (" or $), the mode selected (OVER or UNDER), the memory function (ON or OFF), and the state of the output relay. In the event of measurement overflow, the display indicates OVERFLOW (by three dashes on the screen and the flashing symbol OVER). Parameter entry mode If the user wishes to modify one of the three parameters (Threshold, Hysteresis or Threshold delay), he simply needs to set the corresponding potentiometer and the value of the modified parameter automatically appears. After 2 seconds, the current value of the measured signal reappears in the display : return to NORMAL mode. Exception In UNDER mode (underload), since the hysteresis is always greater than the threshold, it is possible that it will exceed the maximum measurement range according to the settings (Threshold + Hysteresis > Max. Threshold). To remedy this problem, when the user sets the hysteresis or threshold in proportions which exceed the management capacity, the value of the hysteresis is automatically corrected so that it does not exceed the range maximum. In addition, the user is warned by flashing of the symbol UNDER. Parameter display mode To review the parameters, press the pushbutton (VISU) several times in succession, to cycle through the settings. Keep the pushbutton depressed to scroll through the values.
5/36
References, characteristics
References
Control relay with LCD display - Voltage-Current
561060
Reference RM 84 872 301 RM 84 872 305 RM 84 872 310 RM 84 871 305 RM 84 871 310
Supply characteristics
Relay type Supply voltage Operating range Maximum power consumption Immunity to microbreaks Delay on pick-up Creepage distance and clearance Relay type Minimum current Mechanical life Electrical life V RM 84 872 301 $ 24 0.851.10 x Un 1W 10 500 4 kV/3 RM 84 87/ 305/RM 84 87/ 310 " 230 (50/60 Hz) 0.851.10 x Un 3 VA 10 500 4 kV/3
ms ms kV
Output characteristics
mA VA 1 C/O contact, AgCdO, 5 A, 250 V 100 5106 operating cycles 1250, 105 operating cycles Cos = 0.3, 6000 operating cycles L/R = 300 ms, 6000 operating cycles 0.13 seconds 10 % Relay state. OVER or UNDER Mode. Memory function. Type of signal (" or $) Measurement overflow Terminal block: IP 20, front panel: IP 40, enclosure: IP 50 Self-extinguishing Pc 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 0.6 max Operation: - 20+ 60, storage: - 30+ 70 93 % without condensation 2.5/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz c UL us, CSA RM 84 872 301/RM 84 872 305 E1-M E2-M E3-M 0.22 110 660 2 10 60 4 20 120 50 100 300 RM 84 871 305 E1-M E2-M 220 mA 10100 mA 5 1 40 mA 200 mA 1 5 RM 84 872 310 E1-M E2-M 15150 30300 100 300 200 350 2 2 RM 84 871 310 E1-M E2-M 0.11 A 0.55 A 0.1 0.02 2A 10 A 17 20
Other characteristics
Protection class Enclosure Terminal capacity Tightening torque Temperature limits Relative humidity Dielectric strength Product certifications Conforming to IEC 529 With cable end Without cable end mm2 mm2 Nm C kV
5/37
Dimensions
A1
11 E3 E2 E1
45
81
A2 14 12
3 3 50
5/38
Schemes
11 R
A2
M(-)
12
14
R S
AR MA d1 D1
(+)
A1 11 E1 E2 E3
R
12 14 M A2
(-) (-) OV
U V W
M 3~
5/39
Presentation
Functions
These devices are designed for monitoring single-phase voltages. They have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
561037
Applications
# Protection of electronic or electromechanical devices against overvoltage and undervoltage. # Normal/emergency power supply switching.
Presentation
RM4 UB RM4 UB
>U <U R U
1 2 3 4
1 Overvoltage setting potentiometer. 2 Undervoltage setting potentiometer. 3 Time delay function selector: Fault detection delayed. Fault detection extended. 4 Potentiometer for setting time delay in seconds. R Yellow LED: indicates relay state. U Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on. > U Red LED: overvoltage fault. < U Red LED: undervoltage fault.
Operating principle
The voltage to be monitored is connected to terminals L1, L3 of the product. There is no need to provide a separate power supply for RM4 UB relays, they are self-powered by terminals L1, L3. If the voltage goes outside the range to be monitored, the output relay is de-energised: - overvoltage: the red LED > U illuminates, - undervoltage: the red LED < U illuminates. When the voltage returns towards its rated value, the relay is re-energised according to the hysteresis value (5 %) and the corresponding red LED goes out. A selector switch allows selection of an adjustable time delay from 0.1 s to 10 s. With function transient "over" or "under" voltages are not taken into account. With function all variations above or below are taken into account and re-energisation of the relay is delayed. In all cases, in order to be detected, the duration of the overvoltage or undervoltage must be greater than the measuring cycle time (80 ms).
Function diagram
<t
UL1 L3 t
Function
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
<t t
0 Volt
t
Function
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
t : time delay
5/40
References
Width mm 22.5
Reference
Weight kg 0.110
RM4 UB34
RM4 UB
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 UB35
0.110
5/41
Characteristics
Energised during fault free operation. De-energised on detection of an overvoltage or undervoltage fault
3%
0.5 %
10 %
Measuring cycle
ms
5
Measuring input characteristics
Minimum operational voltage V
80
5/42
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
RM4 UB Rail mounting Screw fixing
78
80
22,5
89,5 82
Connection schemes
Terminal blocks RM4 UB
L1 15 L3
L1
L3
18
16
28 18
25 15
26
Voltage to be monitored 1st C/O contact of the output relay 2nd C/O contact of the output relay
28
25
26 16
78
Application schemes
Example
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 Q1 2 4 6
16 RM4 UB L3
15
18
Q4
L1
Q2
Q2
To sensitive loads
5/43
Functions, schemes
# Current transformer incorporated by passing a cable through the front panel. # a.c. current threshold adjustable from " 1 to 20 A (30 Hz to 400 Hz) via button on front panel. # Relay output " 5 A - 250 V - 1 N/O contact. # Multivoltage supply: 5 " 110 to 240 V 50/60 Hz, 5 " or $. 24 V. # 17.5 mm enclosure, clips onto symmetrical DIN rail.
Operating principle
The relay contact (11 and 14) closes if the current is greater than the threshold. The relay contact (11 and 14) opens if the current is less than 15 % (hysteresis) of the threshold.
1 UA1-A2 0
Amplitude of measured current
1
Relay 11 - 14 Closed 11 - 14 Open
0 T1 T2 T3
T1: Delay on pick-up 500 ms maximum T2: Response time to sensing 400 ms 50 % T3: Response time on de-energisation 120 ms 50 %
Connection scheme
U (+) A1 I R 11
(-)
A2
A3
14
5/44
References
a.c. current control relays
Voltage
561003
Weight kg 0.080
RM 84 871 102
Note: The graduated set-point scale on the front panel relates to sinusoidal or delta current measurement. The relay can measure non-sinusoidal currents, for example currents subject to phase control. In this case an error coefficient may be assigned to the display, this coefficient being a function of the tripping angle of the phase controller (form factor).
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Un Frequency Operating range Maximum consumption V Hz " 24 V " 240 V $ 24 V VA VA W "/$ 24/" 110240 50/60 15 % for 24 V $/" , - 15+ 10 % from 110240 V " 1 9 0.6 0.06 %/ C 0.45 % 95 % 120 sinusoidal 30400 10 % of the maximum scale value 15 % of the set value 40 100 A for 3 s 400 50 % 120 50 % 500 max 1 N/O contact (AgCdO) 1250 " 5, $ 5 " 10, $ 10 " 250, $ 250 30 x 106 operating cycles 105 operating cycles at 1250 VA resistive 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 2.5/1 min/1 mA/50 Hz c UL us, CSA
Input characteristics
Measured current range Frequency range of measured current Setting accuracy Switching hysteresis Maximum continuous current Accidental overload current Response time to sensing Delay on pick-up A Hz V A A ms ms
t2 t3 t1
With cable end Without cable end Operation Storage Conforming to IEC 255-5
mm2 mm2 C C kV
Other characteristics
Temperature limits Dielectric strength Product certifications
Dimensions
17,5
18 45
82
16,8 82,2
43,7
4,5
86
5,5
81
5/45
Presentation
Functions
561061
These devices are designed to detect when when current rises above or drops below a preset threshold, on an a.c. or a d.c. supply. They have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed.
Relay type Overcurrent detection Yes Yes Yes Overcurrent or undercurrent detection (1) No Yes Yes Measuring range
RM4 JA01
Applications : - excitation control of d.c. machines, - control of load state of motors and generators, - control of current drawn by a 3-phase motor, - monitoring of heating or lighting circuits, - control of pump draining (undercurrent), - control of overtorque (crushers), - monitoring of electromagnetic brakes or clutches.
561062
Description
RM4 JA01 Width 22.5 mm RM4 JA32 RM4 JA31 Width 22.5 mm RM4 JA32 Width 45 mm
1 2
R U R U
1 2 3 4
R U
1 2 3 4
1 Adjustment of current threshold as % of setting range max. value. 2 Hysteresis adjustment from 5 to 30 % (2). 3 Fine adjustment of time delay as % of setting range max. value. 4 10-position switch combining: - selection of the timing range: 1 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, no time delay, - selection of overcurrent (>) or undercurrent (<) detection. See table below. R Yellow LED: indicates relay state. U Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on.
Table showing details for switch 4 Switch position Function Time delay (t) <0 Undercurrent detection No time delay <1 Undercurrent detection 0.05 to 1 s <3 Undercurrent detection 0.15 to 3 s < 10 Undercurrent detection 0.5 to 10 s < 30 Undercurrent detection 1.5 to 30 s >0 Overcurrent detection No time delay >1 Overcurrent detection 0.05 to 1 s >3 Overcurrent detection 0.15 to 3 s > 10 Overcurrent detection 0.5 to 10 s > 30 Overcurrent detection 1.5 to 30 s (1) Selection by switch on front face. (2) Value of current difference between energisation and de-energisation of the output relay (% of the current threshold to be measured).
5/46
Presentation (continued)
Operating principle
The supply voltage is connected to terminals A1-A2. The current to be monitored is connected to terminals B1, B2, B3 and C. See diagram below. Hysteresis is adjustable between 5 and 30 %: for overcurrent h = (IS1 - IS2) / IS1, for undercurrent h = (IS2 - IS1) / IS1. A measuring cycle lasts only 80 ms, which allows rapid detection of changes in current. Relay set for overcurrent detection (RM4 JA01 or selector on > for model RM4 JA3/). If the current is > the setting threshold IS1, the output relay is energised with or without a time delay, depending on the model. When the current returns to a value IS2 below the threshold, depending on the hysteresis setting, the relay is instantaneously de-energised. Relay set for undercurrent detection (selector on <, model RM4 JA3/ only). If the current is <, the setting threshold IS1, the output relay is energised with or without a time delay, depending on the model. When the current returns to a value IS2 above the threshold, depending on the hysteresis setting, the relay is instantaneously de-energised. Function diagrams: Overcurrent detection
Function > U supply A1-A2 Current measured Relay
IS1 IS2
15-18 15-16 25-28 25-26
5
t <t
t : time delay
Undercurrent detection
Function < U supply A1-A2 IS2 Current measured IS1 Relay
15-18 15-16 25-28 25-26
<t
t : time delay
Measurement
Note: The measurement ranges can be extended by means of a current transformer, the secondary of which is connected to the measuring terminals of the RM4 relay, or by means of a resistor connected in parallel with the measuring input (see example page 5/51 Setting-up).
5/47
References
Overcurrent detection
561068
Time delay
Width
Output relay
Weight
s Without
mm 22.5
1 C/O
RM4 JA01/
kg 0.172
RM4 JA01
561069
s 0.05...30
mm 22.5
2 C/O
RM4 JA31//
kg 0.172
(1) Standard supply voltages RM4 JA01 Volts " 50/60 Hz RM4 JA31 Volts and RM4 JA32 " 50/60 Hz $
24 B 24...240 MW MW
110...130 F 110...130 F
220...240 M 220...240 M
380...415 Q
5/48
Characteristics
Average consumption at Un
Setting accuracy of the switching threshold Switching threshold drift % % Hysteresis (adjustable) Setting accuracy of the time delay Time delay drift % %
As % of the full-scale value: 5 % 0.06 per degree centigrade, depending on the permissible ambient temperature 0.5, within the supply voltage range (0.851.1 Un) 530 of the current threshold setting As % of the full-scale value: 10 % 0.07 per degree centigrade, depending on temperature 0.5, within the supply voltage range (0.85 1.1 Un)
Measuring cycle
ms
80
5/49
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
Dimensions RM4 JA (common side view) Rail mounting RM4 JA/ RM4 JA32 Screw fixing
78
78
80
22,5
45
89,5 82
6
B2
25
Connection schemes
Terminal blocks RM4 JA01
A1 B1
B1 B2
RM4 JA31
C B3
15
RM4 JA32
A2 B2 C B3
15 25
A2 B2
B3
A1 B1
B1 B2 B3
A1
B1
A2
B2
C
B3
B1
15
B3
C
16 18
C
16 18 26 28
C
16 18 26 28
A1
A1
A2
A1
18
16
15
28 18
A2
26 16
25 15
18
16
A2
15
28
26
25
Supply voltage Connection and current values to be measured, depending on type of RM4 JA Currents to be measured RM4 JA01 B1-C 330 mA RM4 JA32 B1-C 0.31.5 A (see table opposite) & RM4 JA31 B2-C 10100 mA B2-C 15 A B3-C 0.11 A B3-C 315 A
Application schemes
Example: detection of blockage on a crusher (overcurrent function) Current measured 15 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Q1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Q1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Q2
Q2
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
26
16
28
18
4/T2
6/T3
26
28
16
B3 C RM4 JA3
A1 A2 1 3 5
18
B3 C RM4 JA3
A1 A2
25
15
25
KM1 2 4 W1 6
Stop
KM1 U1 2 V1 4 W1 6
Stop
U1
V1
Overtorque
Start
KM1
15
Overtorque
Start
KM1
M1 3 N KM1 3
M1 KM1 N
5/50
78
Setting-up
Example of overcurrent to be measured Overcurrent threshold at: 13 A. Output relay time delay: 5 s. Reset current threshold: 11 A Supply voltage: 127 V $
R U
1 2 3 4
# Adjustments: 5 Adjustment of function and timing range, switch 4: - determine whether overcurrent or undercurrent detection is required; in this example, overcurrent, - determine the timing range, immediately greater than the time required; in this example 10 s, - position switch 4 according to the above 2 criteria; in this example, switch 4 on > 10. 5 Fine adjustment of time delay: Depending on the max. range setting displayed at 4 (in the above example: 10 s) use potentiometer 3 to set the required time delay as a % of value 4. In the above example, the required time = 5 s therefore:
t x 100 5 x 100 = = 50 % 4 10
5 Set the current threshold setting potentiometer 1 as a percentage of the maximum value of the measuring range selected when wiring. In the above example: wiring B3-C, max. value of measuring range = 15 A, therefore: Setting 1 =
13 x 100 = 87 % 15
Extension of the measuring range # d.c. or a.c. supply Simply connect a resistor Rs to terminals B1-C (or B2, B3-C) on the measuring input. The relay energisation threshold will be towards the middle of the setting potentiometer range if the value of Rs is in the region of:
Rs =
RM4 JA B1 Ri C Ii = Im/2 I
Ri where: (2I/Im) - 1 Ri Internal resistance of input B1-C, Im Maximum value of threshold setting range, I Current threshold to be measured.
Rs
# Application: Use of relay RM4 JA31// (10 to 100 mA). Connection B2-C to measure a threshold of 1 A, knowing that Ri = 10 for this rating and that Im = 100 mA. 10 The value of Rs will be: = 0.526
(2 x 1/0.1) - 1 0.1 2 P = (1 - 2 ) x 0.526 i.e. 0.47 W
Select a resistor Rs capable of dissipating at least twice the calculated value, i.e. 1 W for this example, in order to limit temperature rise. On an a.c. supply, it is also possible to use a current transformer.
5/51
# Space savings, accurate measurement and optimised functions to improve the safety of your electrical installation. # Control: select "Overcurrent" or "Undercurrent" mode by means of a dip switch on the underside of the unit. # Safety: in the same way, choose whether or not to activate the fault memory function and set the threshold crossing delay T1 and the inhibit time delay T2. a.c./d.c. mode is detected automatically. # Accuracy: 3 products enable you to choose the best product for greater measuring accuracy, provided by a microprocessor.
Without fault memory With fault memory Hysteresis Hysteresis
Control of a.c. / d.c. current with memory The output relay changes state at the end of time delay T1 and remains latched in this position. To reset it, the memory function must be reactivated by disconnecting the auxiliary supply.
T1 T2
T1
T2
Undercurrent function
T2
Relay
T1
T1
T2
Overcurrent function The time delay on energisation T2 prevents current peaks due to motor starting. The delay on upward crossing of threshold T1 provides immunity to transients and other interference, thereby preventing spurious triggering of the output relay.
Undercurrent function The time delay on energisation T2 prevents the occurrence of current troughs. The delay on downward crossing of threshold T1 provides immunity to random dips, thereby preventing spurious triggering of the output relay.
During the time delays, the yellow LED flashes at a frequency of 1 Hz.
Note : In undercurrent mode, the absolute value of the hysteresis cannot be greater than the measurement range maximum. RM 84 871 044
U A1 E1 (+) R 11
Connection schemes
RM 84 871 02/, RM 84 871 03/
A2
M (-)
12
14
A1 - A2 : Supply
A1 - A2 : Supply
Dimensions
4,2
89,7
5/52
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Current control relay
561468
Supply voltage " " " " " " " 24 V 120 V 230 V 24 V 120 V 230 V 230 V
Reference RM 84 871 021 RM 84 871 023 RM 84 871 024 RM 84 871 031 RM 84 871 033 RM 84 871 034 RM 84 871 044
0.110 A
Accessories
Description Current transformer Reference RM 26 852 304 RM 84 871 044 Weight kg 0.065
V VA
230 50/60 Hz
Output characteristics
Output relay Rated current Switching voltage Maximum voltage Rated breaking capacity Minimum breaking current Electrical life Mechanical life Time delay A V V VA mA AC-12 On crossing threshold T1 On energisation T2 s s mA A Hz
Input characteristics
Measurement range
Frequency of the measured signal Adjustable hysteresis Threshold value Threshold setting accuracy Measurement ranges Inputs Sensitivity Input resistance
mA A k C
40500 550 % of the threshold setting 10100 % of the range 10 % E1-M E2-M E3-M E1-M 220 10100 50500 0.11 5 1 0.2 0.1
E1-M 10100 4
Other characteristics
Temperature Relative humidity Enclosure material Degree of protection Connection Tightening torque Dielectric strength Creepage distance and clearance Vibration resistance Without condensation Conforming to IEC 60529 mm2 N.m kV kV Operation: - 20+50, storage: - 40+ 70 95 % Self-extinguishing Enclosure: IP 40D, terminal block: IP 20 Flexible cable without cable end: 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5, flexible cable with cable end: 2 x 1.5 1 2.5 for 1 min at 1 mA 50 Hz 4kV/3 a = 0.035 mm Level 3 (6 kV contact, 8 kV air) Level 3 (10 V/m) Level 3 (2 kV) Level 3 (2 kV) Level 3 (10 V rms) 30 % for 10 ms, 60 % for 100 ms and 1 s, > 95 % for 5 s and 10 ms Class III Class B
5/53
Functions
# Regulation of two thresholds: 5 minimum, 5 maximum. # Emptying control # Probes with a.c. current flowing through them. # Sensitivity adjustment potentiometer on front panel of the device. # Sensitivity adjustable from: 5 250 k to 5 k (low sensitivity), 5 50 k to 1 M (high sensitivity).
Operating principle
Control of maximum and/or minimum levels of conductive liquids (tap water, sea water, waste water, chemical solutions, coffee ...). The operating principle is based on measurement of the apparent resistance of the liquid between two submerged probes. When this value is less than the threshold setting on the front panel of the device, the output relay changes state. To avoid electrolytic phenomena, an a.c. current runs across the probes. Applications in the food-processing, chemical industries, etc.
Un
t1
t2 t3
t4
Output relay
5/54
Liquid level control relays (low and high sensitivity), model RM 84 870
References
Emptying control relays (low and high sensitivity)
Voltage
561007
Sensitivity 250 5 k
" 24 V
Weight kg 0.150
50 k1 M
RM 84 870 131
0.150
RM 84 870 131
Note : the probe cable (maximum length 100 metres) needs not be screened, but it is inadvisable to fit it in parallel with the power supply cables. If a screened cable is used, do not exceed the capacities indicated.
Characteristics
Relay type Supply voltage Supply range Maximum power consumption Sensitivity adjustment Measurement accuracy (at maximum sensitivity) Maximum electrode voltage Maximum electrode current Maximum cable capacity Initialisation time Response time (t3) High level (t1) Low level (t4) nF ms ms VA V RE 84 870 121 " 24 (50/60 Hz) RE 84 870 131
15 % of Un - 15+ 10 % if other products are mounted on the same rail 3 250 k5 k 30 % 50 k1 M 30 % " 24 (50/60 Hz) 50 A (50/60 Hz) 1 650 600 2 seconds
Output relay (to meet AC-1 requirements, resistive load) Galvanic isolation via transformer (4 kV, 8 mm creepage distance) Isolation of contacts and electrodes from the supply 1 min/1 mA/50 Hz (IEC 60 225-5) Creepage distance Conforming to IEC 60664-1 and clearance Ambient air temperature Operation Storage Degree of protection Enclosure Terminal block
1 C/O contact, cadmium-free, 8 A/ " 250 V Class II VDE 0551 kV kV C C " 2.5 4kV/2 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 IP 50 IP 20 Self-extinguishing Pc c UL us, CSA
Dimensions
4,2
3,5
72 100
Functions : page 5/54 Schemes : page 5/78
22,5
57
5/55
Functions, schemes
# # 5 5 # # #
Controlling the levels of conductive liquids Regulation of two thresholds: minimum, maximum. Emptying function. Plug-in, 8 or 11-pin. Sensitivity adjustable from 5 k to 100 k.
Operating principle
Control of maximum and/or minimum levels of conductive liquids (tap water, sea water, waste water, chemical solutions, coffee ...). The operating principle is based on measurement of the apparent resistance of the liquid between two submerged probes. When this value is less than the threshold setting on the front panel of the device, the output relay changes state. To avoid electrolytic phenomena, an a.c. current runs across the probes. Applications in the food-processing, chemical industries, etc.
T
Max. level Min. level Output relay Down Level being controlled
Emptying function
Connection scheme
R S T
11-pin 8-pin
5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 3 2
5 6 7
11
c
Input
b a
a b M P c
For RM 84 870 807 (special 11-pin base fitting), pin 5 must be connected to a (maximum) and pin 7 must be connected to c (common).
5/56
References
Liquid level control relays
Number of pins
561008
Reference RM 84 870 301 RM 84 870 303 RM 84 870 304 RM 84 870 306 RM 84 870 308 RM 84 870 309 RM 84 870 807
8-pin
11-pin
Note : The probe cable (maximum length 100 metres) need not be screened, but it is inadvisable to fit it in parallel with the power supply cables. Screened cable may be used, with the screening connected to the common.
Accessories
Description 11-pin socket Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference RUZ 1A Weight kg 0,067
Characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum power consumption Sensitivity adjustment Measurement accuracy (at maximum sensitivity) Maximum electrode voltage Maximum electrode current Maximum cable capacity Response time High level Low level VA k V " 24, 120, 230 (50/60 Hz) 0.851.15 x Un 3 5100 0+ 30 % V mA nF ms ms " 24 (50/60 Hz) 1 (50/60 Hz) 10 300 500 1 C/O contact, AgCdO " 8 A max. Class II VDE 0551 kV C C " 2.5 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 c UL us, CSA
Output relay (to meet AC-1 requirements, resistive load) Galvanic isolation via transformer (4 kV, 8 mm creepage distance) Isolation of contacts and electrodes from the supply Temperature limits Operation Storage
Product certifications
Dimensions
70 39
3,5
16
50
5/57
Presentation
Functions
561078
These devices monitor the levels of conductive liquids. They control the actuation of pumps or valves to regulate levels and are also suitable for protecting submersible pumps against running empty, or protecting tanks from "overflow". They can also be used to control dosing of liquids in mixing processes and to protect heating elements in the event of non immersion. They have a transparent, hinged flap on their front face to avoid any accidental alteration of the settings. This flap can be directly sealed. # 5 5 5 5 5 # 5 5 5 5 Compatible liquids: spring, town, industrial and sea water, metallic salt, acid or base solutions, liquid fertilizers, non concentrated alcohol (< 40 %), liquids in the food-processing industry: milk, beer, coffee, etc. Non-compatible liquids: chemically pure water, fuels, liquid gasses (inflammable), oil, concentrated alcohol (> 40 %), ethylene, glycol, paraffin, varnish and paints.
RM4 LG01
Description
RM4 LG01 Width 22.5 mm
561079
5
R U
2 3
R U
1 2 3 4
RM4 LA32
1 Fine adjustment of time delay (as % of setting range max. value). 2 Fine adjustment of response sensitivity (as % of setting range max. value). 3 Function selector switch: - empty or fill . 4 Switch combining: - selection of the response sensitivity range, - selection of time delay on energisation or on de-energisation of the relay. R U Yellow LED: indicates relay state. Green LED: indicates that supply to the RM4 is on.
Table showing details for switch 4 Switch position Time delay 500 On-delay 500 Off-delay 50 On-delay 50 Off-delay 5 On-delay 5 Off-delay
Sensitivity High = 500 k range High = 500 k range Medium = 50 k range Medium = 50 k range Low = 5 k range Low = 5 k range
5/58
Presentation (continued)
Operating principle
The operating principle is based on a change in the resistance measured between immersed or non-immersed electrodes. Low resistance between electrodes: liquid present. High resistance between electrodes: no liquid present. The electrodes may be replaced by other sensors or probes which transmit values representing variations in resistance. The a.c. measuring voltage which is < 30 V and galvanically insulated from the supply and contact circuits, ensures safe use and the absence of any electrolysis phenomena. RM4 relays may be used: # For detection of a liquid level, operating with 2 electrodes, one reference electrode and one high level electrode, or an LA9 RM201 probe. Example: prevention of tank overflow. # For regulating a liquid level between a minimum and a maximum level, operating with 3 electrodes, one reference electrode, one low level electrode and one high level electrode, or two LA9 RM201 probes. Example: water tower. The state of the output relay can be configured: # Empty function : the output relay is energised when high level electrode B2 is immersed and is de-energised when low level electrode B3 is "dry" (1). # Fill function : the output relay is energised when the low level electrode is "dry" and is de-energised when high level electrode is immersed (1). On model RM4 LA32 a time delay can be set on energisation or de-energisation of the output relay in order to raise the maximum level function or to lower the minimum level function . This function also makes it possible to avoid pulsing of the output relay (wave effect) when operating with 2 electrodes.
Empty function, maximum level detection (2 electrodes or 1 probe LA9 RM201)
Type RM4Function switch 3 Time delay switch 4
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
U supply A1/A2
5
t t
15/18 15/16
Empty function, regulation between a maximum and a minimum level (3 electrodes or 2 probes LA9 RM201)
Time delay switch 4
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
U supply A1/A2
15/18 15/16
t
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26 15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
U supply A1/A2
15/18 15/16
t
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26 15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
Fill function, regulation between a maximum and a minimum level (3 electrodes or 2 probes LA9 RM201)
Time delay switch 4
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
B1 B3 B2
U supply A1/A2
15/18 15/16
t
15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26 15/18 25/28 15/16 25/26
B1 : reference electrode B2 : high level electrode B3 : low level electrode (1) When operating with 2 electrodes, the high level electrode performs both high and low level functions. References : page 5/60 Characteristics : page 5/61 Dimensions, schemes : page 5/62 Setting-up : page 5/63
5/59
References
References
Liquid level control relays
561087
Time delay
Width
Output relay
Without
mm 22.5
1 C/O
Basic reference, to be Weight completed by adding the voltage code (1) kg RM4 LG01/ 0.165
RM4 LG01
Adjustable 0.1...10 s
561088
22.5
2 C/O
RM4 LA32//
0.165
RM4 LA32
5
561089
Suspended by cable
LA9 RM201
LA9 RM201 (1) Standard supply voltages RM4 LG01 Volts " 50/60 Hz RM4 LA32 Volts 24...240 " 50/60 Hz MW $ MW 24 B 24 B 110...130 F 110...130 F 220...240 M 220...240 M 380...415 Q 380...415 Q
5/60
Characteristics
24...240
Average consumption at Un
VA
1.9
2.6
2.4
2.9
2.7
3.1
2.7
2.6
3.4
2.4
/ fill
Maximum a.c. electrode voltage (peak to peak) Maximum current in the electrodes
24
24
mA
nF
10
200
25
100
1000
100
20
(1) The electrodes may also be incorporated in the probes. The probes are normally designed for fixing to a tank by means of a bracket with a seal (closed tanks) or suspended by their own electrical connecting cable (boreholes, etc.). See page 5/63 Setting-up Probe LA9-RM201.
5/61
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
RM4 LG01, LA32 Rail mounting Screw fixing
78
80
22,5
89,5 82
150
Connection schemes
RM4 LG01
A1 B1 15 B2
16
RM4 LA32
A1 B1 15 B2 25 B3
B3
B1
B2
B1
B2
B3
B3
15
15
16
18
26
16
18
A1
A1
A2
18
16
A2
28 18
A2
26 16
A2
A1-A2 Supply voltage B1, B2, B3 Electrodes (see table opposite) 15-18 15-16 25-28 25-26 1 C/O contact of the output relay 2 C/O contact of the output relay
nd st
Electrodes and level controlled B1 B2 B3 Reference or tank earth electrode High level Low level
5/62
28
25
6 4
78
Setting-up
Setting-up
# Select the empty /fill function according to the sequence to be performed. # If necessary, set potentiometer 1 to minimum (time delay). # Set potentiometer 2 to minimum; on RM4-LA, select the lowest sensitivity range using potentiometer 4 (5 or 5 ). # With all the electrodes immersed, turn the sensitivity potentiometer towards maximum until the relay is energised ( function) or de-energised ( function), then exceed the threshold by about 10 % to compensate for variation in the supply voltage. If the relay is not able to energise, a higher sensitivity scale must be used (selector 4 on RM4 LA32) or relay RM4 LG must be replaced by an RM4 LA32 relay and the adjustment procedure must be started again. # Then check that the relay de-energises ( function) or energises ( function) as soon as electrodes B3 and B2 are out of the liquid. If the relay does not de-energise, select a lower sensitivity scale. # The electrode connection point must be protected against corrosion by sticking or sealing. In areas where thunderstorms are likely to occur, 1 measures must also be taken to protect the 2 2 electrode lines. R 3 3 Note: the high level can be raised by means of the R U U 4 adjustable time delay from 0.1 to 10 seconds with function . The low level can be lowered by means of this same time delay with function .
RM4 LG01 RM4 LA32
Probe LA9 RM201 This probe is of the "suspension" type. It is coaxial, i.e. in addition to the normal (central) electrode, the stainless steel skirt can also act as earth (reference electrode), which means that there is no need to install a separate reference probe. In this way, for controlling one level, only one probe is required instead of 2; for controlling 2 levels, only 2 probes are required instead of 3. The connecting cable must be of the 2-conductor cable in "2-conductor" type, with common cylindrical PVC cylindrical sheath (max 6.3 mm) sheath, having a maximum diameter of 6.3 mm. The skirt also acts as a "calming chamber", so avoiding inaccuracy due to an agitated surface of Level electrode the liquid (waves). Maximum operating temperature: 100 C. Reference electrode Probe LA9 RM201 can also be fixed on various (skirt) containers (cisterns, tanks, ...) by means of a bracket or other suitable fixing device.
LA9 RM201
Connection examples
Control by electrodes
High level Low level
A1
B1
B2
B3
B1
B2
Supply voltage
B3
A2
Control by probes
RM4 LG01 B2 B3 B1 B2 B1
2 levels
1 level
5/63
Functions
# Regulation of two levels: 5 minimum, 5 maximum. # Monitoring of filling (UP) or emptying (DOWN) selectable by means of switch on the front panel of the device. # Probes with a.c. current flowing through them. # Sensitivity adjustment potentiometer on front panel of the device. # Sensitivity adjustable from 5 k to 100 k.
Operating principle
Control of maximum and/or minimum levels of conductive liquids (tap water, sea water, waste water, chemical solutions, coffee ...). The operating principle is based on measurement of the apparent resistance of the liquid between two submerged probes. When this value is less than the threshold setting on the front panel of the device, the output relay changes state. To avoid electrolytic phenomena, an a.c. current runs across the probes. Applications in the food-processing, chemical industries, etc.
T
Max. level Min. level Down or Up Level being controlled
Output relay
Note : If the voltage break T lasts 1 second or more, the relay is instantly re-energised if in UP mode and is de-energised if in DOWN mode.
5/64
References
Filling (UP) and emptying (DOWN) control relays
Voltage
561006
" 24 V
Weight kg 0.140
" 120 V
RM 84 870 003
0.140
RM 84 870 001
" 230 V
RM 84 870 004
0.140
Note : The probe cable (maximum length 100 metres) need not be screened, but it is inadvisable to install it in parallel with the power supply cables. A screened cable may be used, with the screening connected to the common.
Characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum power consumption Sensitivity adjustment Measurement accuracy (at maximum sensitivity) Electrode voltage (maximum) Electrode current (maximum) Maximum cable capacity Response time High level Low level Output relay (to meet AC-1 requirements, resistive load) Galvanic isolation via transformer (4 kV, 8 mm creepage distance) Isolation of contacts and electrodes from the supply Temperature limits Operation Storage Product certifications VA k V " 24, 120, 230 (50/60 Hz) 0.851.15 x Un 3 5100 0+ 30 % V mA nF ms ms " 24 (50/60 Hz) 1 (50/60 Hz) 10 300 500 1 C/O contact, AgCdO " 8 A max. Class II VDE 0551 kV C C " 2.5 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 c UL us, CSA
Dimensions
4,2
89,7
3,5
99,3
57
5/65
Functions
# Control and automatic regulation of liquid levels. # 2 sensitivity ranges. # Fill or empty function selectable via dip switch. # High or low level alarm selectable via dip switch. # Selectable memory. # Power on, output relay state and alarm relay state indication LEDs.
Operating principle
Control of the level of a conductive liquid at specific points (high and low levels) with alarm when the level is abnormally high or abnormally low. The operating principle is based on measurement of the apparent resistance of the liquid between submerged probes. When this value is below the threshold setting on the front panel of the device, the output relay R1 and/or the alarm relay R2 change state. To avoid electrolysis phenomena, an a.c. current runs across the probes. Sensitivity adjustment Set the sensitivity so that the relay changes state when the probes are in contact with the liquid. Then check that the relay returns to its initial position as soon as the probes emerge. In certain applications, fine adjustment of sensitivity leads to the detection of undesirable factors, such as the presence of foam or bubbles on the surface of the liquid, or the appearance of leakage impedance between probes (extended line capacity, humidity ...).
Note : Latching of alarm relay R2 in the de-energised state, in the event of a fault, can be programmed via a switch on the underside of the device (the switch must be operated with the device switched off). To reset alarm relay R2, the power supply to the device must be switched off, provided that the levels have been re-established.
Programming The level controller can be Memory programmed by means of 3 switches on the underside Alarm of the device: Function
0 ON High Fill
Note : Memory, Alarm and Function selections must only be made with the device switched off.
5
Un Max. Min. AI R1 R2
T3
T1
T2 T3
T2
T4
On energisation, probe AI is submerged, relays R1 and R2 change to the energised state and the pump is ON: filling starts, the LED for relay R1 is lit. When the liquid reaches the max. level probe, relay R1 changes to the de-energised state and the pump is OFF: filling stops, the LED for relay R1 goes out. Relay R1 re-energises when the min. level probe emerges. In the event of a fault (continual drop in level) probe AI is emerged, relay R2 changes to the de-energised state and the alarm is triggered: the LED for relay R2 comes on. This fault can be memorised.
Memory ON
R1 R2
T1 T2 T3
On energisation, the level in the tank is low, relays R1 and R2 change to the energised state and the pump is ON: filling starts, the LED for relay R1 is lit. When the liquid reaches the max. level probe, relay R1 de-energises and the pump is OFF: filling stops and the relay LED goes out. In the event of a fault, if the level continues to rise and reaches probe AI, relay R2 de-energises and the alarm is triggered: the LED for relay R2 comes on. This fault can be memorised.
Memory ON
T3 T2 T2
Memory ON
R1 R2
T1 T3 T2 T3 T4
On energisation, the min. level and max. level probes are submerged and probe AI is above the level of the liquid. Relays R1 and R2 change to the energised state and the pump is ON: emptying starts, the LED for relay R1 is lit. When the min. level probe emerges, relay R1 de-energises and the pump is OFF: emptying stops, the LED for relay R1 goes out. The relay re-energises when the max. level probe is submerged. In the event of a fault, if the level continues to rise and reaches probe AI, relay R2 de-energises and the alarm is triggered: the LED for relay R2 comes on. This fault can be memorised.
5/66
" 24 V
Weight kg 0.280
" 230 V
RM 84 870 504
0.280
RM 84 870 504
Note: The probe cable need not be screened, but it is inadvisable to install it close to the power supply cables. In order to conform to the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) a screened cable must be used, with the screening connected to the common and to earth. V Rated Maximum t1 t4 VA VA ms s ms " 24 or 230 (50/60 Hz) galvanic isolation by transformer 0.851.15 Un 3 at Un 4 at Un + 15 % 10 About 2 500 Category III, degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC 664-1/VDE 0110 : 4 kV/2 5100 k 30 % at maximum sensitivity " 15 (50/60 Hz) 1 400 700 2 C/O contacts, AgCdO 2000 VA, 80 W " 8, $ 8 " 100, $ 100 " 250, $ 250 2 x 106 operating cycles 2000 VA - 105 operating cycles Cos = 0.3 - 6000 operating cycles L/R = 300 ms - 6000 operating cycles Self-extinguishing Pc 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 - 20+ 60 (conforming to IEC 68-1-14) - 30+ 70 (conforming to IEC 68-1-1/2) 93 % without condensation c UL us, CSA Dimensions
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum power Immunity to microbreaks Delay on pick-up Response time on de-energisation Insulation coordination Sensitivity range Setting accuracy Electrode voltage Electrode current Response time
Control characteristics
V mA ms ms
On immersion On emersion
t2 t3
Other characteristics
Enclosure material Terminal capacity Temperature limits Relative humidity Product certifications With cable end Without cable end Operation Storage mm2 mm2 C C
3,5
23
77 5 4,2
78,5
A2 12 14 22 21 24
100
M P
45
Note : If the reservoir is conductive (metal), it can be used as the reference electrode (C).
5/67
89,7 99,3
57
R1
R2
Functions, scheme
# Control and automatic regulation of liquid levels. # Sensitivity adjustable from 5 to 100 k. # Combined regulation of emptying a well and filling a tank. # Power on and output relay state indication LED.
Operating principle
Control of tank filling at 2 levels (min. 1, max. 1) with simultaneous control of well or supply tank emptying at 2 levels (min 2, max 2) in order to protect the pump against running empty. The operating principle is based on measurement of the apparent resistance of the liquid between two submerged probes. To avoid electrolytic phenomena, an a.c. current runs across the probes. In certain applications, fine adjustment of sensitivity leads to the detection of undesirable factors, such as the presence of foam or bubbles on the surface of the liquid, or the appearance of leakage impedance between probes (extended line capacity, humidity ...).
T1
T2
T3
T4
Max.
Start Stop
5/68
References
Combined fill/empty function
Voltage
561032
" 230 V
Weight kg 0.250
RM 84 870 604
Note: The probe cable (maximum length 100 metres) need not be screened, but it is inadvisable to install it close to the power supply cables. In order to conform to the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) a screened cable must be used, with the screening connected to the common and to earth.
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Power Immunity to microbreaks Delay on pick-up Response time on de-energisation Creepage distance and clearance V Rated Maximum t1 t4 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 VA ms ms ms kV " 230 (50/60 Hz) galvanic isolation via transformer 0.851.15 Un 3 max at Un 4 at Un + 15 % 10 400 500 4kV/2
Control characteristics
Sensitivity range Setting accuracy Electrode voltage Electrode current Accuracy Response time V mA On immersion On emersion t2 t3 ms ms 5100 k 30 % at maximum sensitivity " 15 (50/60 Hz) 1 30 % at maximum sensitivity 400 700 1 C/O contact, AgCdO 2000 VA, 80 W " 8, $ 8 " 100, $ 100 " 250, $ 250 5 x 106 operating cycles 2000 VA - 105 operating cycles Cos = 0.3 - 6000 operating cycles L/R = 300 ms - 6000 operating cycles
Other characteristics
Enclosure material Terminal capacity Temperature limits Relative humidity Product certifications With cable end Without cable end Operation Storage mm2 mm2 C C Self-extinguishing Pc 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 - 20+ 60 (conforming to IEC 68-1-14) - 30+ 70 (conforming to IEC 68-1-1/2) 93 % without condensation c UL us, CSA
Dimensions
3,5 23 77 5 4,2
78,5
100
45
89,7 99,3
57
5/69
Functions, scheme
# Controlling the levels of conductive liquids. # Combined fill/empty function. # Combined regulation of emptying a well and filling a tank. # Plug-in, 11-pin. # Output relay state indication LED. # Sensitivity adjustable from 5 k to 100 k.
Operating principle
Combined fill/empty function The output relay changes state when the level of the liquid in the tank reaches the maximum level probe, with the minimum level probe submerged. It returns to its initial state when the minimum level probe is no longer in contact with the liquid. When the level of the liquid in the well reaches the minimum level probe, the pump stops. If, on energisation or after a power cut, the maximum level probe in the tank is above the liquid level, reset the device by pressing button BP. Emptying control
Un
(1)
Max. level Well Min. level
(1)
(1)
(1) Pushbutton
Connection scheme
R S T
5 4 3 2
7 8 9
11
10
Pushbutton
Input
a b M P
Well
For RM 84 870 808 (special 11-pin base fitting), pin 5 must be connected to a (maximum) and pin 7 must be connected to c (common).
5/70
Plug-in liquid level control relays, combined empty/fill functions, model RM 84 870
References
Liquid level control relays
Number of pins
561009
Voltage " 24 V
11-pin
Weight kg 0.140
" 120 V
RM 84 870 403
0.40
" 230 V RM 84 870 40/ Special 11-pin base fitting " 230 V
RM 84 870 404
0.140
RM 84 870 808
0.190
Accessories
Description 11-pin socket Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference RUZ 1A Weight kg 0.067
Note: The probe cable (maximum length 100 metres) need not be screened, but it is inadvisable to fit it in parallel with the power supply cables. Screened cable may be used, with the screening connected to the common.
Characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum power consumption Sensitivity adjustment Measurement accuracy (at maximum sensitivity) Maximum electrode voltage Maximum electrode current Maximum cable capacity Response time High level Low level VA k V " 24, 120, 230 (50/60 Hz) 0.851.15 x Un 3 5100 0+ 30 % V mA nF ms ms " 24 (50/60 Hz) 1 (50/60 Hz) 10 300 500 1 C/O contact, AgCdO " 8 A max. Class II VDE 0551 kV C C " 2.5 - 20+ 60 - 30+ 70 c UL us, CSA
Output relay (to meet AC-1 requirements, resistive load) Galvanic isolation via transformer (4 kV, 8 mm creepage distance) Isolation of contacts and electrodes from the supply Ambient air temperature Product certifications Operation Storage
Dimensions
70 39
3,5
16
50
5/71
References
Probes
Application No. Length of probes mm 1000 Operating temperature C 80 Maximum pressure Reference Weight
561034
Recommended 3 for drinks vending machines and where installation space is limited (Stainless steel)
kg/cm2 2
RM 79 696 044
kg 0.800
RM 79 696 043
Suitable for 1 boilers, pressure vessels and under high temperature conditions (1) (304 stainless steel) Description
1000
200
25
RM 79 696 014
0.360
Weight kg 0.150
5
RM 79 696 006
Electrode holders
Description Electrode for use up to 350 C and 15 kg/cm2 (2) Material Stainless steel isolated by ceramic Reference RM 79 696 006 Weight kg 0.150
(1) 3/8" BSP mounting thread with hexagonal head. Use a 24 mm spanner for tightening. (2) 3/8" BSP mounting thread.
5/72
Dimensions
Probes
RM 79 696 044
38.5 11 32 7 12 11
14
26
1m
27.5
RM 79 696 014
G 3/8A 6
1000
60
60
RM 79 696 043
80
25
5
C1
Electrode holder
RM 79 696 006
Across flats
84 46 6,5 13 20,7 29
5/32 whit 1/4 whit
9,5
3/8 tapered NPT
49
5/73
# Detection of motor underspeed, stoppage, running speed or stalling. # Information detected by 3-wire or NAMUR sensor, or by contact or voltage. # Adjustable time from 100 ms to 10 min in 4 subranges. # Power-on inhibit time adjustable from 0.3 to 30 seconds. # Default time delay adjustable from 0.3 to 3 seconds. # Power on and output relay state indication LEDs. Without latching
Output relay
With latching
200 ms min. U
_ _
3,5
23
77 5 4,2
78,5
89,7
45
R 12 14
+ 8V2 Y2 A2
100
Volt-free Namur
Terminal identification AI - A2 : Supply voltage 11 - 12 - 14 : Output relay (R) + 24 V - E - 0 V : 3-wire PNP sensor E-0V : Voltage input + 8 V 2 - Y2 : Contact/NAMUR sensor input
5/74
99,3
57
References, characteristics
References
Underspeed control
Voltage
561005
Weight kg 0.255
RM 84 874 301
0.255
RM 84 874 303
0.255
RM 84 874 304
0.255
Supply characteristics
Relay type Supply voltage Un Operating range Maximum power consumption Immunity to microbreaks Creepage distance and clearance Input circuit V RM 84 874 300 $ 24 0.851.15 Un 1 W max at Un and 1.5 W at Un + 15 % 10 4 kV/3 RM 84 874 301/RM 84 874 303/ RM 84 874 304 " 24, " 110, " 230 0.851.15 Un 3.5 VA max at Un and 5 VA at Un + 15 % 10 4 kV/3
ms kV
Cut-off frequency Minimum impulse time Minimum time between impulses Selection of time delay and memory function Without memory With memory Hysteresis Setting accuracy Repeat accuracy Temperature drift Voltage drift Reset time Reset time for S2 Inhibit time delay
V k V V Hz ms ms
ms ms s
Other characteristics
Enclosure material Terminal capacity Temperature limits Relative humidity Product certifications With cable end Without cable end Operation Storage mm2 mm2 C C Self-extinguishing Pc 2 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 - 20+ 60 (conforming to IEC 68-1-14) - 30+ 70 (conforming to IEC 68-1-1/2) 93 % without condensation c UL us, CSA
5/75
Functions
# Self-powered # Control of motor overload and underload # Measurement of phase displacement between voltage and current (Cos ). # Independent adjustment of minimum and maximum thresholds, from 0.1 to 0.99. # Power-on inhibit time adjustable from 0.5 to 20 seconds. # Default time delay adjustable from 0.3 to 3 seconds. # 2 output relays (one per threshold). # Power on and output relay state indication LEDs.
Operating principle
The control relay is used for motor protection. The variation in the power factor (voltage/current phase displacement or Cos ) is related to the variation in the mechanical load of the motor. The control relay monitors the power factor, and therefore the mechanical load, and checks that it is between two defined and adjustable limits. A green LED indicates that the power supply is ON. Two yellow LEDs indicate the state of the output relays. On power-up, the two output relays are closed for the duration of the inhibit time (T2 adjustable from 0.5 to 20 seconds). If the power factor value is between the two threshold settings, both relays are closed. If the power factor exceeds the maximum value set by the user, the high threshold relay is de-energised after a time delay T1 (adjustable from 0.3 to 3 seconds). During this time delay, the green LED flashes (1 Hz). The relay closes again as soon as the value measured drops below the threshold, less the hysteresis. If the power factor drops below the minimum value set by the user, the low threshold relay is de-energised after a time delay T1 (adjustable from 0.3 to 3 seconds). During this time delay, the green LED flashes. The relay closes again as soon as the value measured has risen above the threshold, plus the hysteresis. If the value of the high threshold is set as less than or equal to the low threshold value, the green LED flashes rapidly (2 Hz).
3-phase supply
R1 R2
T2 T1 T1
5/76
References
Motor load control relays (Cos )
561004
Weight kg 0.360
" 3 x 400 V
RM 84 873 401
0.360
RM 84 873 400
Supply characteristics
Supply voltage Un Operating range Power Immunity to microbreaks Creepage distance and clearance V Rated Maximum Conforming to IEC 60664-1 VA VA ms kV " 230, 400, self-powered via L1 and L2 0.851.15 Un 2 at Un 3 at Un + 15 % 10 4kV/3
Other characteristics
Enclosure material Terminal capacity Temperature limits Relative humidity Product certifications mm2 C
Dimensions
3,5 23 77 5 4,2
78,5
100
Functions : page 5/76 Schemes : page 5/81
45
89,7 99,3
57
5/77
Schemes
R S T N S
A2
12
14
A1 11 R
Max
A1 - A2 : Supply
12 14
A2
Stop Max.
M
RM 84 870 00/ (References : page 5/65)
Regulation of two levels Up filling control
Common
Output
R S T N S
R S T N S
A1 11 R 12 14
C Min Max
A1 11 R
C Min Max
A2
12 14
A2
Input Input Max. Min. Start Output Max. Min. Start Output
Common
Common
5/78
Schemes (continued)
L1
L2
L3 R
11
L1
L2
L3 R
11
21
12
14
12
14 22
24
RM 84 892 299, RM 84 873 01/, RM 84 873 3// (References : pages 5/21 and 5/23)
(4)
R S
R S
(1) (4)
(1)
D1
A1 11 R S T 11 R S T
D1 (2)
12 14
R (3) 12 14
A2
(2)
(3) AR U V W MA d1 MA d1 AR U V W
M 3~
(1) Isolating switch (2) Contactor (3) Alarm (4) Supply
M 3
(1) Isolating switch (2) D1 Contactor (3) Alarm (4) Auxiliary power supply for contactor coil and signalling
11
3
12 14
Terminal referencing L1 - L2 - L3 : 3-phase supply being monitored 12 - 13 - 14 : Output relay 21 - 22 - 24 : Output relay
5/79
Schemes (continued)
(1)
D1
(2)
11 R S T
R
12 14
U V W
AR
MA
d1
M 3~
11 R S T
21
11
21
>3 ~< U
12 14 22 24
>
N
3~ < U
12 14 22 24
: 3-phase supply being monitored : Output relay (R1) lower threshold : Output relay (R2) upper threshold
Terminal referencing Terminals L1 - L2 - L3 - N : 3-phase supply being monitored 11 - 12 - 14 : Output relay (R1) lower threshold 21 - 22 - 24 : Output relay (R2) upper threshold
A1 11 R
R S T A1 11 R R S T
12 14
Auxiliary power supply
A2 12 14
Auxiliary power supply
N A2
(-)
A2
12
14
(-)
A2
12
14
A1 - A2 : Supply
A1 - A2 : Supply
5/80
Schemes (continued)
+
A1 11
Supply voltage to be monitored
~
A1 11
Supply voltage to be monitored
~
A1 11
Supply voltage to be monitored
R
12 14 A2
R
12 14 M A2
R 12 14 A2
~ +
S1
(+) A1 11 E1 E2 E3
~ ~
L1
R
12 14
DC
M A2 (-) (-) OV
L2
~ _
RM 84 873 40/ (References : page 5/77)
Operation on a 3-phase supply I < 10 A "
3 x 400 V~ M
5
Operation on a 3-phase supply I > " 10 A
3 x 400 V~ M
External current transformer
L1
L2
L3
11
21
L1
L2
L3
11
21
Internal shunt
R1
R2
Internal shunt
R1
R2
12
14
22
24
12
14
22
24
L1
L2
L3
11
21
Internal shunt
R1
R2
Terminal referencing L1 - L2 - L3 : Supply to be monitored E : Current read output 11 - 12 - 14 : Output relay (R1) lower threshold 21 - 22 - 24 : Output relay (R2) upper threshold
12
14
22
24
5/81
6/0
Contents
6/1
Selection guide
Number of I/O
10
12
20
Number of discrete inputs (of which analogue inputs) Number of "relay" or "transistor" outputs
6 (0)
8 (4)
12 (2)
12 (6)
Supply voltage
$ 24 V, " 100...240 V
I/O extensions
No
No
Clock
No
Yes
Depends on model
Depends on model
LADDER
LADDER
References
SR2 /101//
SR2 /121//
SR2 B122BD
SR2 A201//
Pages (1) FBD: Function Block Diagram 1 Available: 1st quarter 2004.
6/14
6/14
6/14
6/14
6/2
10
26
6 (4)
16 (6)
10
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR3 B10///
SR3 B26///
6/15
6/3
Presentation
Presentation
Zelio Logic smart relays are designed for use in small automated systems. They are used in both industrial and commercial applications. # For industry: 5 automation of small finishing, production, assembly or packaging machines. 5 decentralised automation of ancillary equipment of large and medium-sized machines in the textile, plastics and materials processing sectors, 5 automated systems for agricultural machinery (irrigation, pumping, greenhouses, ...). # For the commercial/building sectors: 5 automation of barriers, roller shutters, access control, 5 automation of lighting installations, 5 automation of compressors and air conditioning systems. Their compact size and ease of setting-up make them a competitive alternative to solutions based on cabled logic or specific cards. Simple programming, ensured by the universal nature of LADDER and function block diagram FBD (1) languages, meets all automation requirements and also the needs of the electrician. Compact smart relays are suitable for simple automated systems, up to 20 I/O. If required, modular smart relays can be fitted with I/O extensions and a module for communication on the Modbus network, for greater performance and flexibility, from 10 to 40 I/O. Programming Programming can be carried out: # independently, using the buttons on the smart relay (ladder language), # on a PC, using "Zelio Soft" software. When using a PC, programming can be carried out either in LADDER language, or in function block diagram language (FBD). LCD display backlighting (2) Backlighting of the display is programmable using Zelio Soft software and by direct action on the smart relay's 6 programming buttons. Memory The Zelio Logic smart relay has a backup memory which allows programs to be copied into another smart relay (examples: for building identical equipment, remote transmission of updates). The memory also allows a backup copy of the program to be saved prior to exchanging the product. When used with a smart relay without display or buttons, the copy of the program contained in the cartridge is automatically transferred into the smart relay at powerup. Autonomy and backup Autonomous operating time of the clock, ensured by a lithium battery, is 10 years. Data backup (preset values and current values) is provided by an EEPROM Flash memory (10 years). I/O extensions Zelio Logic smart relays can, if necessary, take the following I/O extensions: # 6, 10 or 14 I/O, supplied with $ 24 V via the smart relay, # 6, 10 or 14 I/O, supplied with " 24 V via the smart relay, # 6, 10 or 14 I/O, supplied with " 100... 240 V via the smart relay. Communication module 1 A module for communication on the Modbus network will be available for Zelio Logic modular smart relays. It is supplied with $ 24 V via the smart relay. Communication interface 11 The "communication" products in the Zelio Logic range include: # a communication interface connected between a smart relay and a modem, # analogue or GSM modems, # Zelio Soft Com software. They are designed for monitoring or remote control of machines or installations which operate without personnel. The communication interface, supplied with $ 12/24 V, allows messages, telephone numbers and call conditions to be stored.
(1) FBD: Functional Block Diagram. (2) LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
109446
SR2 B121BD
1
109458
1 Modular smart relay (10 or 26 I/O) 2 I/O extension module (6,10 or 14 I/O)
6/4
Description
4 5
6 1 7 1 7
4 5
6 1 7
1 3
1 3
6/5
Functions
"Simulation" mode
"Monitoring" mode
6/6
Presentation
LADDER language
Definition LADDER language allows a LADDER program to be written with elementary functions, elementary function blocks and derived function blocks, as well as with contacts, coils and variables. The contacts, coils and variables can be annotated. Text can be placed freely within the graphic. # Control scheme input modes Zelio input mode enables users who have directly programmed the Zelio smart relay to find the same user interface, even when using the software for the first time. Free input mode, which is more intuitive, is very user-friendly and incorporates many additional features. With LADDER programming language, two alternative types of symbol can be used : 5 LADDER symbols, 5 electrical symbols. "Free input" mode also allows the creation of mnemonics and notes associated with with each line of the program. Instant switching from one input mode to the other is possible at any time, by clicking the mouse. Up to 120 control scheme lines can be programmed, with 5 contacts and 1 coil per program line.
Timer
Up/down counter
Fast counter
Analogue comparator
Clock
Control relay
Counter comparator
LCD backlighting
Output coil
# Functions: 5 16 time delay function blocks; parameters of 11 different types can be set for each th Summer/Winter time switching of these (1/10 second to 9999 hours), 5 16 up/down counter function blocks from 0 to 32767, 5 1 fast counter (1 kHz), 5 16 text function blocks, 5 16 analogue comparator function blocks, 5 8 clock function blocks, each with 4 channels, 5 28 control relays, 5 8 counter comparators, 5 automatic Summer/Winter time switching, 5 variety of coil functions, latching (Set/Reset), impulse relay, contactor 5 LCD screen with programmable backlighting.
Functions
Function Contact Electrical scheme
13 21
6
LADDER language I or i or
14 22
Notes I corresponds to the real state of the contact connected to the input of the smart relay. i corresponds to the inverse state of the contact connected to the input of the smart relay.
Standard coil
A1
The coil is energised when the contacts to which it is connected are closed.
A2
The coil is energised when the contacts to which it is connected are closed. It remains tripped when the contacts re-open.
A1
A2
The coil is de-energised when the contacts to which it is connected are closed. It remains inactive when the contacts re-open.
A2
6/7
Presentation (continued)
Bistable latching - Priority assigned either to SET or RESET function PRESET COUNT
Allows conversion of an analogue value by change of scale and offset. COMP IN ZONE
Display of digital and analogue data, date, time, messages for Human-Machine interface. ARCHIVE
Comparison of 2 analogue values using the operands =, >, <, 6, 4. SPEED COUNT
Divergence to OR CONV-AND 2
Convergence to OR
Divergence to AND
Convergence to AND
Logic functions
AND OR NAND
OR function XOR
NOT OR function (1) Functional Block Diagram. (2) Sequential Function Chart.
Exclusive OR function
NOT function
6/8
Characteristics
Environment characteristics
Product certifications Conformity with the low voltage directive Conformity with the EMC directive Degree of protection Overvoltage category Degree of pollution Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum relative humidity Maximum operating altitude Conforming to 73/23/EEC Conforming to 89/336/EEC Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60664-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 61131-2 C Operation Storage C UL, CSA, GL, C-TICK EN 61131-2 EN 61131-2 (Zone B) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-4 IP 20 3 2 -20... +55 (+40 in enclosure), conforming to IEC 60068-2-1 and IEC 60068-2-2 -40... +70 95 % without condensation or dripping water 2000 3048 IEC 60068-2-6, test Fc IEC 60068-2-27, test Ea IEC 61000-4-2, level 3 IEC 61000-4-3, level 3 IEC 61000-4-4, level 3 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6, level 3 IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 61000-4-12 Class B 1 conductor: 0.25...2.5, cable: AWG 24... AWG14 2 conductors: 0.25...0.75, cable: AWG 24... AWG18 1 conductor: 0.2...2.5, cable: AWG 25... AWG14 1 conductor: 0.2...2.5, cable: AWG 25... AWG14 2 conductors: 0.2...1.5, cable: AWG 24... AWG16 0.5
m Operation Transport m Mechanical resistance Immunity to vibrations Immunity to mechanical shock Resistance to Immunity to electrostatic discharge electrostatic discharge Resistance to HF interference Immunity to (Immunity) electromagnetic radiated fields Immunity to fast transients in bursts Immunity to shock waves Radio frequency in common mode Voltage dips and breaks (") Immunity to damped oscillation wave Conducted and Conforming to EN 55022/11 radiated emissions (Group 1) Connection to screw terminals Flexible cable with cable end mm2 (Tightened using 3.5 screwdriver) Semi-solid cable mm2 Solid cable mm2 Tightening torque N.m
$ 12 V supply characteristics
Smart relay type Primary Nominal voltage Voltage limits Including ripple Nominal input current Maximum nominal input current with extensions Power dissipated Micro-breaks Permissible duration Protection V V mA mA WA ms SR2 B121JD 12 10.414.4 120 144 1.5 6 1 (repeated 20 times) Against polarity inversion SR2 B201JD 12 10.414.4 200 250 2.5
$ 24 V supply characteristics
Smart relay type Primary Nominal voltage Voltage limits Including ripple Nominal input current Maximum nominal input current with extensions Power dissipated Maximum power dissipated with extensions Micro-breaks Permissible duration Protection V V mA mA WA W ms SR2 SR2 SR2 /1/1BD /1/2BD /2/1BD 24 24 24 19.230 19.230 19.230 100 100 100 3 3 6 6 1 (repeated 20 times) Against polarity inversion SR2 /2/2BD 24 19.230 100 3 SR3 B101BD 24 19.230 100 100 3 8 SR3 B102BD 24 19.230 50 160 4 8 SR3 B261BD 24 19.230 190 300 6 10 SR3 B262BD 24 19.230 70 180 5 10
Permissible duration
6/9
Characteristics (continued)
Processing characteristics
Smart relay type Number of control scheme lines Number of function blocks Cycle time Response time Back-up time (in the event of power failure) Program memory checking Clock drift Timer block accuracy With LADDER programming With FBD programming ms ms Day/time Program and settings SR2/SR3 120 Up to 200 10 20 10 years (lithium battery) at 25 C 10 years (EEPROM memory) At each power-up 12 min/year (0 to 55 C) 6 sec/month (at 25 C and calibration) 1 % 2 of the cycle time
State 0 to 1 State 1 to 0 3-wire 2-wire Between supply and inputs Between inputs
kHz
State 0 to 1 (50/60 Hz) State 1 to 0 (50/60 Hz) Between supply and inputs Between inputs Against inversion of terminals
6/10
Characteristics (continued)
Conversion
A V A V A V A V A mA
No-load At Ie (operational current) In millions of operating cycles Conforming to IEC 60947-1 and 60664-1 Trip Reset Short-circuit Against overvoltage and overload
Hz Hz kV ms ms
6/11
Curves
d.c. loads
DC-12 (1)
Millions of operating cycles
24 V
DC-13 (2)
Millions of operating cycles
0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
L/R = 60 ms 24 V
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
Current (A)
(1) DC-12: switching resistive loads and photo-coupler isolated solid state loads, L/R 1ms. (2) DC-13: switching electromagnets, L/R 2 x (Ue x Ie) in ms, Ue: Rated operational voltage, Ie: rated operational current (with protection diode on load, use the DC-12 curves and apply a coefficient of 0.9 to the millions of operating cycles value)
6/12
Curves (continued)
a.c. loads
AC-12 (1)
Millions of operating cycles
3,0 2,5 2,0 48 V 1,5 1,0 0,5 0,0 0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5 Current (A) 110 V 230 V
24 V
AC-14 (2)
Millions of operating cycles
110 V 230 V 48 V 24 V
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
2 Current (A)
AC-15 (3)
Millions of operating cycles
1,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,0 0,5 0,7 0,9 1,1 1,3 1,5 1,7 1,9
Current (A)
110 V 230 V 48 V
(1) AC-12: switching resistive loads and photo-coupler isolated solid state loads, cos 0.9. (2) AC-14: switching small electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is 72 VA, making: cos = 0.3, breaking: cos = 0.3. (3) AC-15: switching electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is > 72 VA, making: cos = 0.7, breaking: cos = 0.4.
6/13
References
Supply $ 12 V
12 20
109440
8 12
4 6
Supply $ 24 V
10 12 20 6 8 8 12 12 12 0 4 4 2 6 6 4 4 0 8 8 0 0 0 4 0 0 8 No Yes Yes No Yes Yes SR2 A101BD (1) SR2 B121BD SR2 B122BD SR2 A201BD (1) SR2 B201BD SR2 B202BD 0.250 0.250 0.220 0.380 0.380 0.280
Supply " 24 V
12 20 8 12 0 0 4 8 0 0 Yes Yes SR2 B121B SR2 B201B 0.250 0.380
SR2 A201BD
Reference
Weight
kg 4 4 8 8 0 0 0 0 No Yes No Yes SR2 D101BD (1) SR2 E121BD SR2 D201BD (1) SR2 E201BD 0.220 0.220 0.350 0.350
Supply $ 24 V
10 12 20 6 8 12 12 0 4 2 6
Supply " 24 V
12 20 8 12 0 0 4 8 0 0 Yes Yes SR2 E121B SR2 E201B 0.220 0.350
Reference
Weight kg 0.700
Supply $ 24 V
12 An SR2 B121BD compact smart relay with display, a connecting cable and Zelio Soft programming software supplied on CD-Rom. An SR2 B201BD compact smart relay with display, a connecting cable and Zelio Soft programming software supplied on CD-Rom. SR2 PACKBD
20
SR2 PACK2BD
0.850
SR2 PACK2FU
0.850
SR2 PACK///
6/14
References
Reference
Weight
kg 4 0 10 (1) 0 0 4 0 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes SR3 B101BD SR3 B102BD SR3 B261BD SR3 B262BD 0.250 0.220 0.400 0.300
Supply $ 24 V
10 6 6 16 16 4 4 6 6
26
Supply " 24 V
10 26 6 16 0 0 4 10 (1) 0 0 Yes Yes SR3 B101B SR3 B261B 0.250 0.400
6 16
0 0
4 10 (1)
0 0
Yes Yes
0.250 0.400
4 6 8
2 4 6
Supply $ 24 V
10 An SR3 B101BD modular smart relay, a connecting cable and Zelio Soft programming software supplied on CD-Rom. An SR3 B261BD modular smart relay, a connecting cable and Zelio Soft programming software supplied on CD-Rom. SR3 PACKBD
26
SR3 PACK2BD
0.850
6/15
References
510352
SR2 CBL01
0.150
Back-up memory
Description SR2 SFT01 EEPROM back-up memory Reference SR2 MEM01 Weight kg 0.010
Supply $ 12/24 V
Communication interface
Weight kg 0.140
SR2 MEM01
510353
Documentation
6
SR2 COM01
Reference SR2 MAN01EN SR2 MAN01FR SR2 MAN01DE SR2 MAN01ES SR2 MAN01IT SR2 MAN01P0
510354
(1) CD-Rom containing "Zelio Soft" software, an application library, a self-training manual, installation instructions and a users manual. (2) See pages 6/20 to 6/25 (3) See our catalogue "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies".
ABL7 RM1202
6/16
Dimensions
59,5
SR2 B201JD, SR2 A201BD, SR2 B20/BD, SR2 B201B, SR2 A201FU, SR2 B201FU, SR2 D201BD, SR2 E201BD, SR2 E201B, SR2 D201FU and SR2 E201FU (20 I/O) SR3 B26/BD and SR3 B261FU (26 I/O)
Mounting on 35 mm rail Screw fixing (retractable lugs)
107,6
100
90
59,5
124,6
113,3
2x4
107,6
100
90
59,5
35,5 25 2x4
100
110 100
90
59,5
72 60 2x4
110
90
6/17
Schemes
Input connections
3-wire sensors
SR2 ////BD, SR2 B121JD and SR3 ////BD
(1)
BL BK BN BL BK BN
I1 I2 I3 I4 IB IC ID IE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Analogue inputs
SR2 B12/BD, SR2 B121JD and SR3 B10/BD
$ 0-10 V ANALOG.
Ca / Ta 1
Ca / Ta 2
(1)
10 m maximum
Ca / Ta 1
Ca / Ta 2
(1)
10 m maximum
I1 I2 I3 I4 IB IC ID IE
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 IB IC ID IE IF IG
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
6/18
Schemes (continued)
(1)
+
c 24 V
(1)
+
I1 I2 I3 I4 IB IC ID IE
I1 I2 I3 I4 IB IC ID IE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
+ Q1
(3)
Q2
Q3
Q4
L/+
(2)
+
U z 12240 V 50/60 Hz or c 24 V
(3)
U c 1224 V
(1) 1 A quick-blow fuse or circuit-breaker. (2) Fuse or circuit-breaker. (3) Inductive load.
(1)
L N
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
L/+
(2)
(3)
(3)
(1) 1 A quick-blow fuse or circuit-breaker. (2) Fuse or circuit-breaker. (3) Inductive load.
6/19
Presentation
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
Converters for thermocouples and Pt100 probes Voltage/current converters
The Zelio Analog range of converters is designed to convert signals emitted by sensors or electrical measurements into standard electrical signals which are compatible with automation platforms, controllers (thermal processes, speed, ). They also allow the connection distance between a sensor and the measurement acquisition device to be increased: for example between a thermocouple and a programmable controller. Conforming to IEC standards, UL and CSA certified, these converters are suitable for universal use. Measurement signals for thermocouples and Pt100 probes The voltages induced by thermocouples vary between 10 and 80 V/C, Pt100 probes (100 ohms at 0 C) produce about 0.5 mV/C, with measurement currents of 1 mA. Depending on the sensor, the signal to be measured ranges from a few V (thermocouple) to 250 and 700 mV for a Pt100 probe. It is therefore difficult to transmit these low level signals over long electric lines without encountering problems of interference, signal reduction or errors. Connecting Zelio Analog converters close to the sensors resolves these problems : - 4-20 mA current loops transmitted over a long distance are less sensitive to interference than low level voltage signals from sensors, - signal reductions during transmission (resistance) of voltages do not occur, - the cables used to connect the converters to process equipment (programmable controllers) are standard cables, which are more cost effective than extension cables or compensation cables suitable for low level signals for Pt100 probes or thermocouples.
Presentation
The Zelio Analog range The Zelio Analog range has been developed both to take account of the most common applications and to ensure great simplicity of installation: # pre-set input and output scales, requiring no adjustment # outputs protected against reverse polarity, overvoltage and short-circuits # $ 24 V power supply # sealable protective cover # rail mounting and screw fixing onto mounting plate # LED indicator on the front panel # input and output selector switches on the front panel # output with fallback value if no input signal is present (due to failure of a sensor, for example). The Zelio Analog converter range is divided into four families: # Converters for J and K type thermocouples: RMT J/K # Converters for Universal Pt100 probes: RMP T/0 # Converters for Optimum Pt100 probes: RMP T/3 # Universal voltage/current converters: RMC. Converters for J and K type thermocouples Thermocouples, which consist of two metals with different thermo-electric characteristics, produce a voltage that varies according to temperature. This voltage is transmitted to the Zelio Analog converter which converts it to a standard signal. Converters for thermocouples have cold junction compensation to allow detection of measurement errors induced by the connection to the device itself. Converters for J and K type thermocouples have : # for inputs, a pre-set temperature range, depending on the model: 5 Type J: 0...150 C, 0...300 C, 0...600 C 5 Type K: 0...600 C, 0...1200 C. # for outputs, a switchable signal: 5 0...10 V, 0... 20 mA, 4... 20 mA.
108999 108997
RMT J40BD
RMT K90BD
6/20
Presentation (continued)
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
Converters for thermocouples and Pt100 probes Voltage/current converters
109000
RMP T70BD
Converters for Universal Pt100 probes Pt100 probes with platinum resistor are electrical conductors whose resistance varies according to the temperature. This ohmic resistance is transmitted to the Zelio Analog converter which converts it to a standard signal. Converters for Universal Pt100 probes have: # for inputs, a pre-set temperature range, depending on the model: 5 - 100...100 C, 5 - 40...40 C, 5 0...100 C, 5 0...250 C, 5 0...500 C. # for outputs, a switchable signal: 5 0... 10 V, 0... 20 mA, 4... 20 mA. The products in the Universal Pt100 family allow wiring of Pt100 probes in 2, 3 and 4-wire mode. Converters for Optimum Pt100 probes Derived from the above family, these converters have: # for inputs, a pre-set temperature range identical to that of converters for Universal Pt100 probes. # for outputs: 5 a 0... 10V signal dedicated to Zelio Logic analogue inputs. They allow Pt100 probes to be wired in 2, 3 and 4-wire mode.
109002
RMC A61BD
Universal voltage/current converters This family of converters allows the adaptation of electrical values (voltage/current). Four products are available: # a cost effective converter which will convert a 0...10 V signal to a 4...20mA signal or vice versa. # a Universal voltage/current converter allowing the most common signals. They have: 5 for inputs, a voltage/current range: - 0...10 V, 10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA. 5 for outputs, a switchable voltage/current range: - 0...10 V, 10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA. # two Universal voltage/current converters which allow conversion of electrical power signals, both a.c. and d.c. They have the following, depending on the model: 5 for voltage inputs, a range of 0 to 500 V (" or $) 5 for outputs, a switchable voltage/current range: - 0...10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA. 5 for current inputs, a range of 0 to 15 A (" or $) 5 for outputs, a voltage/current range: - 0...10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA.
Description
108998
Zelio Analog converters have the following on their front panel, depending on the model: 1 Two terminals for $ 24 V supply connection 2 A 'Power ON' LED 3 Three input selector switches (depending on model) 4 An output selector switch (depending on model) 5 A sealable protective cover 6 A screw terminal block for inputs 7 A screw terminal block for outputs.
4 5
6 7
RMC L55BD
6/21
Characteristics
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
Converters for thermocouples and Pt100 probes Voltage/current converters
Environment characteristics
Converter types Conforming to standards Approvals Degree of protection Housing Terminal block Flame resistance Shock resistance Vibration resistance Immunity to EMC Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Surge withstand Disturbance Radiated/conducted Insulation voltage Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Degree of pollution Mounting Connection Tightening torque kV C C CISPR11 and CISPR22 Group1- Class B 2 - 40...85 (- 40...185 F) Mounted side-by-side: 0...50 (32...122 F); 2 cm spacing: 0...60 (32...140 F) 2 conforming to IEC 60 664-1 35 mm DIN rail, clip-on or fixed on mounting plate 2 x1.5 or 1 x 2.5 cable 0.6...1.1 C RMT J/K/////, RMP /////, RMC///// IEC 947-1, IEC 584-1 (IEC 751, DIN 43760 for RMP////) UL, CSA, GL, & IP 50 IP 20 850 conforming to UL, IEC 695-2-1 50 gn/11ms conforming to IEC 68-2-27 5 gn (10...100 Hz) conforming to IEC 68-2-6 Level 3: 8 (air), 6 (contact) conforming to IEC 1000-4-2 On the power supply: 2; on the input-output: 1 conforming to IEC 1004-4 0.5 - waves 1.2/50s; 0.5 J conforming to IEC 1000-4-5
kV kV kV
mm2 Nm
Specific characteristics
Types of converter for thermocouples Input types Thermocouple type, to IEC 584 Temperature range Analogue output switchable to voltage or current Voltage Range Minimum impedance of load Current Range Maximum impedance of load Built-in protection Safety feature Output state when no inputs are wired or when input wire broken Supply Voltage Maximum current consumption Built-in protection Signalling Measurements Accuracy Repeatibility error C F V k mA RMT J40BD J (Fe-CuNi) 0...150 32...302 RMT J60BD 0...300 32...572 RMT J80BD 0...600 32...1112 RMT K80BD K (Ni-CrNi) 0...600 12...1112 RMT K90BD 0...1200 32...2192
0...10 100 0...20; 4...20 500 Reverse polarity, overvoltage ( 30 V) and short-circuit Output predetermined according to type of output selected: voltage = - 13 V current = 0 mA 24 20 %, non isolated 40 60 Reverse polarity Green LED (power on) 1 of the full scale value 0.25 of the full scale value 0.8 of the full scale value 200 (0.02 %) Built-in, cold junction measurement: 0 to 60 C (0...140 F)
$V mA mA
% % % ppm/C
6/22
Characteristics (continued)
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
Converters for thermocouples and Pt100 probes Voltage/current converters
Supply Voltage Maximum current consumption Built-in protection Signalling Measurements Accuracy Repeatibility error
$V mA mA
At 20 C
At 20 C At 60 C Temperature coefficient Connection in 2-wire mode Maximum resistance of cable Types of voltage/current converters Input types Voltage
0.5 of the full scale value (3, 4-wire connection) 1 of the full scale value (2-wire connection) % 0.2 of the full scale value % 0.6 of the full scale value ppm/C 150 (0.015 %) m V 200 RMC N22BD $ 0...10
Current
mA A
4...20
0...20; 4...20
RMC A61BD
Range Minimum impedance of load Range Maximum impedance of load Output state when no inputs are wired or when input wire broken
V k mA
By cabling Switchable Switchable By cabling 0...10 0...10; 10 0...10 0...10 100 4...20 0...20; 4...20 0...20; 4...20 0...20; 4...20 500 Reverse polarity, overvoltage ( 30 V) and short-circuit Output predetermined according to type of output selected: voltage: voltage: voltage: 0 V - 2.5 V - 10+ 10 V = -10 V current: current: 0+ 10 V = 0 V 020 mA = 0 mA 6 mA current: 420 mA = 4 mA 020 mA = 0 mA 420 mA = 4 mA $ 24 20 % $ 24 20 % isolated (1.5 kV) non isolated 40 70 60 90 Reverse polarity Green LED (power on) 1 of the full scale value 0.2 of the full scale value 0.6 of the full scale value 200 (0.02 %) 5 of the full scale value
Supply Voltage Maximum current consumption Built-in protection Signalling Measurements Accuracy Repeatibility error
V mA mA
At 20 C At 20 C At 60 C Temperature coefficient
% % % ppm/C
6/23
References
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
Converters for thermocouples and Pt100 probes Voltage/current converters
108999
108997
RMT J40BD
RMT K90BD
Type K
0600 01200
109000
Pt100 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire - 100100 0100 RMP T70BD 0250 0500
109001
- 148212 010 V or 420 mA RMP T23BD 32212 32482 32932 010 V or 420 mA RMP T33BD 010 V or 420 mA RMP T53BD 010 V or 420 mA RMP T73BD
6
RMP T13BD
Output signal
Reference
RMC N22BD
108998
Switchable: RMC L55BD 010 V, 10 V, 020 mA, 420 mA Switchable: RMC V60BD 010 V, 0...20 mA, 420 mA 010 V or 0...20 mA RMC A61BD or 420 mA
Weight kg 0.120
0.150
0.150
Connection accessories
Description Type Sold in lots of Terminal blocks for Screw 100 connection of protective Spring 100 earth conductor (1) Converters dedicated to Zelio Logic smart relays. Weight kg AB1 RRTP435U 0.025 AB1 RRTP435U2 0.015 Unit reference
RMC L55BD
RMC A61BD
6/24
Analogue interfaces
Zelio Analog
6
Dimensions, mounting
RMT //////RMP //////RMC ///// RMT //////RMC A61BD RMP ////// RMC ////// Mounting on rails AM1 ///// Panel mounting
2x4
(1)
(1)
90 78 78 90,5 90,5 83
80
25 31
45 51
Schemes
RMT J////, RMT K//// RMP T/0BD
2 mA A1 1930 V
Type J or K
RMP T/3BD
2 mA c 1930 V Vo IP1 A1 IP2 IP3 IP4 A2 0V Vo Io OPG 1930 V
(1) (1)
OPG
OPG
(1) Use one output only. Input connections on RMP T///// 2-wire type RL1 + RL2 200 m
RL1 IP1 IP2 IP3 RL2 IP4 RL2 RL3
RMC L55BD
A1 1930 V A2 0V Vi I V Ii
IPG
RMC V60BD
A1 1930 V A2 0V
OPG
(1) (1)
Vo
OPG
0V
V1 V2 V3 IPG
Vo
OPG
OPG
RMC A61BD
1930 V
(1) Use one input only. (2) Use one output only. References : page 6/24
6/25
7/0
Contents
7 - Services
# Index 5 Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 # Technical information 5 Protective treatment according to climatic environment . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4 5 Product standards and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 5 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8 # Schneider Electric worldwide 5 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
7/1
A AB1 RRTP435U AB1 RRTP435U2 ABF TE20EP100 ABF TE20EP200 ABF TE20EP300 ABF TE20SP100 ABF TE20SP200 ABF TE20SP300 ABF TP26MP100 ABF TP26MP200 ABF TP26MP300 ABL 7CEM24006 ABL 7CEM24012 ABL 7RE2402 ABL 7RE2403 ABL 7RE2405 ABL 7RM1202 ABL 7RM2401 ASI ABLM3024
6/24 6/24 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/14 1/14 1/14 1/14 1/14 6/16 6/16 1/8 and 1/14
5/62
RC 26 546 830
RC 26 546 831
RC 87 610 040 RC 87 610 050 RC 87 610 140 RC 87 610 150 RC 87 610 240 RC 87 610 250 RC 87 610 340 RC 87 610 440 RC 87 618 222 RC 87 618 224 RC 87 618 228 RC 87 618 262 RC 87 618 264 RC 87 618 268 RC 87 618 322 RC 87 618 324 RC 87 618 328 RC 87 618 362 RC 87 618 364 RC 87 618 368 RC 87 619 222 RC 87 619 224 RC 87 619 228 RC 87 619 322 RC 87 619 324 RC 87 619 328 RE 88 826 004 RE 88 826 014 RE 88 826 044 RE 88 826 054 RE 88 826 103 RE 88 826 105 RE 88 826 115 RE 88 826 125 RE 88 826 135 RE 88 826 145 RE 88 826 155 RE 88 826 503
4/11 to 4/17 4/11 to 4/17 4/11 to 4/17 4/11 4/11 4/17 4/17 4/13 4/13 4/15 4/15 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/24 4/25 4/25 4/25 4/25 4/25 4/25 3/6 3/6 3/7 3/7 3/15 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15
RE 88 857 003 RE 88 857 005 RE 88 857 103 RE 88 857 105 RE 88 857 301 RE 88 857 302 RE 88 857 307 RE 88 857 400 RE 88 857 406 RE 88 857 409 RE 88 857 502 RE 88 857 504 RE 88 857 508 RE 88 857 601 RE 88 857 604 RE 88 857 607 RE 88 857 701 RE 88 857 704 RE 88 857 707 RE 88 865 103 RE 88 865 105 RE 88 865 115 RE 88 865 125 RE 88 865 135 RE 88 865 145 RE 88 865 155 RE 88 865 175 RE 88 865 176 RE 88 865 215 RE 88 865 265 RE 88 865 303 RE 88 865 305 RE 88 865 503 RE 88 867 100 RE 88 867 103 RE 88 867 105 RE 88 867 135 RE 88 867 155 RE 88 867 215 RE 88 867 300 RE 88 867 303 RE 88 867 305 RE 88 867 415 RE 88 867 435 RE 88 867 455 RE 88 896 201 RE 88 896 202 RE 88 896 203 RE 88 896 206 RE 88 896 207 RE7 CL11BU RE7 CP13BU RE7 CV11BU RE7 MA11BU RE7 MA13BU RE7 ML11BU RE7 MV11BU RE7 MY13BU RE7 MY13MW RE7 PD13BU RE7 PE11BU RE7 PM11BU RE7 PP13BU RE7 RA11BU RE7 RB11MW RE7 RB13MW RE7 RL13BU RE7 RM11BU RE7 TL11BU RE7 TM11BU RE7 TP13BU RE7 YA12BU RE7 YR12BU RE8 CL11BUTQ RE8 PD11BTQ RE8 PD11FUTQ
3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/55 3/51 3/51 3/51 3/57 3/57 3/57 3/57 3/57 3/57 3/19 3/18 3/18 3/18 3/19 3/19 3/19 3/19 3/19 3/22 3/23 3/23 3/22 3/19 3/41 3/41 3/40 3/40 3/41 3/40 3/45 3/45 3/44 3/44 3/44 3/45 3/47 3/47 3/47 3/47 3/47 3/27 3/29 3/27 3/26 3/28 3/29 3/26 3/29 3/29 3/29 3/27 3/27 3/29 3/27 3/27 3/28 3/28 3/27 3/26 3/26 3/28 3/29 3/29 3/35 3/36 3/36
RE8 PD21BTQ RE8 PD21FUTQ RE8 PD31BTQ RE8 PD31FUTQ RE8 PE11BUTQ RE8 PE21BUTQ RE8 PE31BUTQ RE8 PT01BUTQ RE8 RA11BTQ RE8 RA11FUTQ RE8 RA21BTQ RE8 RA21FUTQ RE8 RA31BTQ RE8 RA31FUTQ RE8 RA41FUTQ RE8 RB11BUTQ RE8 RB31BUTQ RE8 RB51BUTQ RE8 TA11BUTQ RE8 TA21BUTQ RE8 TA31BUTQ RE8 TA41BUTQ RE8 TA61BUTQ RE8 YA32BTQ RE8 YA32FUTQ RE8 YA32QTQ RE8 YG11BUTQ RE8 YG21BUTQ RE8 YG31BUTQ RE9 MS21MW RE9 RA11MW7 RE9 RA21MW7 RE9 RA31MW7 RE9 RA51MW7 RE9 TA11MW RE9 TA21MW RE9 TA31MW RE9 TA51MW RM 26 852 304 RM 79 696 006 RM 79 696 014 RM 79 696 043 RM 79 696 044 RM 84 870 001 RM 84 870 003 RM 84 870 004 RM 84 870 121 RM 84 870 131 RM 84 870 301 RM 84 870 303 RM 84 870 304 RM 84 870 306 RM 84 870 308 RM 84 870 309 RM 84 870 401 RM 84 870 403 RM 84 870 404 RM 84 870 501 RM 84 870 504 RM 84 870 604 RM 84 870 807 RM 84 870 808 RM 84 871 021 RM 84 871 023 RM 84 871 024 RM 84 871 031 RM 84 871 033 RM 84 871 034 RM 84 871 044 RM 84 871 102 RM 84 871 305 RM 84 871 310 RM 84 872 021 RM 84 872 023 RM 84 872 024 RM 84 872 031
3/36 3/36 3/36 3/36 3/36 3/36 3/36 3/37 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/35 3/35 3/35 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/34 3/37 3/37 3/37 3/37 3/37 3/37 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 5/55 5/74 5/74 5/74 5/74 5/67 5/67 5/67 5/57 5/57 5/59 5/59 5/59 5/59 5/59 5/59 5/73 5/73 5/73 5/69 5/69 5/71 5/59 5/73 5/55 5/55 5/55 5/55 5/55 5/55 5/55 5/47 5/39 5/39 5/37 5/37 5/37 5/37
RM 84 872 033 RM 84 872 034 RM 84 872 046 RM 84 872 047 RM 84 872 056 RM 84 872 057 RM 84 872 301 RM 84 872 305 RM 84 872 310 RM 84 873 004 RM 84 873 010 RM 84 873 012 RM 84 873 015 RM 84 873 016 RM 84 873 201 RM 84 873 211 RM 84 873 299 RM 84 873 300 RM 84 873 301 RM 84 873 310 RM 84 873 311 RM 84 873 400 RM 84 873 401 RM 84 873 501 RM 84 873 502 RM 84 873 511 RM 84 873 512 RM 84 874 300 RM 84 874 301 RM 84 874 303 RM 84 874 304 RM4 JA01/ RM4 JA31// RM4 JA32// RM4 LA32// RM4 LG01/ RM4 TA01 RM4 TA02 RM4 TA31 RM4 TA32 RM4 TG20 RM4 TR31 RM4 TR32 RM4 TR33 RM4 TR34 RM4 TU01 RM4 TU02 RM4 UA01/ RM4 UA02/ RM4 UA03/ RM4 UA31// RM4 UA32// RM4 UA33// RM4 UB34 RM4 UB35 RMC A61BD RMC L55BD RMC N22BD RMC V60BD RMP T10BD RMP T13BD
5/37 5/37 5/35 5/35 5/35 5/35 5/39 5/39 5/39 5/17 5/23 5/23 5/23 5/23 5/27 5/27 5/17 5/25 5/25 5/25 5/25 5/79 5/79 5/21 5/21 5/19 5/19 5/77 5/77 5/77 5/77 5/50 5/50 5/50 5/62 5/62 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/13 5/30 5/30 5/30 5/30 5/30 5/30 5/43 5/43 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/16 and 6/24 6/24 6/16 and 6/24 6/24 6/16 and 6/24 6/24 6/16 and 6/24
RMT J40BD RMT J60BD RMT J80BD RMT K80BD RMT K90BD RSB 1A120// RSB 1A160// RSB 2A080// RSZ E1S35M RSZ E1S48M RSZ L300 RSZ R215 RUN 21C21// RUN 21C22// RUN 21D21// RUN 21D22// RUN 31A21// RUN 31A22// RUN 31C21// RUN 31C22// RUN 33A22// RUW 010P7 RUW 030BD RUW 040BD RUW 041P7 RUW 042B7 RUW 042P7 RUW 101MW RUZ 1A
RUZ 1C RUZ 1D
RUZ 200 RUZ 210 RUZ 7A RUZ 7D RXL 2A12B1// RXL 2A12B2// RXL 3A10B1// RXL 3A10B2// RXL 4A06B1// RXL 4A06B2// RXL 4G06B1// RXL 4G06B2// RXN 21E11// RXN 21E12// RXN 41G11// RXN 41G12// RXW 040MD RXZ 200 RXZ 300 RXZ 310 RXZ 7G RXZ E15114M RXZ E1M114 RXZ E1M114M RXZ E1S108M RXZ E1S111M RXZ E1S114M RXZ L320 RXZ P10 RXZ P20 RXZ R235
6/24 6/16 and 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/24 6/24 2/11 2/11 2/11 2/11 2/11 2/11 2/11 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5, 3/44, 5/59 and 5/73 2/5 2/5, 3/40 and 3/55 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 3/47 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9 2/9
7/2
RZM 021BN
RZM 021FP
RZM 021RB
RZM 031BN
RZM 031FPD
RZM 031RB
RZM 040W
RZM 041BN7
RZM 041FU7
2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11 2/8 and 2/11
SR3 B261B SR3 B261BD SR3 B261FU SR3 B262BD SR3 MBU01BD SR3 PACK2BD SR3 PACK2FU SR3 PACKBD SR3 PACKFU SR3 XT101B SR3 XT101BD SR3 XT101FU SR3 XT141B SR3 XT141BD SR3 XT141FU SR3 XT61B SR3 XT61BD SR3 XT61FU T TSX PCX 1031 TSX PCX 3030 TWD ALM 3LT TWD AMI 2HT TWD AMM 3HT TWD AMO 1HT TWD DDI 16DK TWD DDI 16DT TWD DDI 32DK TWD DDI 8DT TWD DDO 16TK TWD DDO 16UK TWD DDO 32TK TWD DDO 32UK TWD DDO 8TT TWD DDO 8UT TWD DMM 24DRF TWD DMM 8DRT TWD DRA 16RT TWD DRA 8RT TWD FCN 5K20 TWD FCN 5K26 TWD FCW 30K TWD FCW 30M TWD FCW 50K TWD FCW 50M TWD FST 16D10 TWD FST 16D20 TWD FST 16R10 TWD FST 16R20 TWD FST 20DR10 TWD FST 20DR20 TWD FTB 2T10 TWD FTB 2T11 TWD FTB 2T11 TWD FTB 2T13 TWD FTB 2T16 TWD LCAA 10DRF TWD LCAA 16DRF TWD LCAA 24DRF TWD LMDA 20DRT TWD LMDA 20DTK TWD LMDA 20DUK TWD LMDA 40DTK TWD LMDA 40DUK TWD NAC 232D TWD NAC 485D TWD NAC 485T TWD NOI 10M3 TWD NOZ 232D TWD NOZ 485D TWD NOZ 485T TWD NOZ //// TWD SPU 1001 V10M TWD SPU 1002 V10M TWD USE 10AD
6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15
TWD USE 10AE TWD USE 10AF TWD USE 10AI TWD USE 10AS TWD XCA 2A10M TWD XCA RJ030 TWD XCP MFK32
S SR1 KIT02 SR1 MOD01 SR1 MOD02 SR2 A101BD SR2 A101FU SR2 A201BD SR2 A201FU SR2 B121B SR2 B121BD SR2 B121FU SR2 B121JD SR2 B122BD SR2 B201B SR2 B201BD SR2 B201FU SR2 B201JD SR2 B202BD SR2 CBL01 SR2 COM01 SR2 D101BD SR2 D101FU SR2 D201BD SR2 D201FU SR2 E121B SR2 E121BD SR2 E121FU SR2 E201B SR2 E201BD SR2 E201FU SR2 MAN01DE SR2 MAN01EN SR2 MAN01ES SR2 MAN01FR SR2 MAN01IT SR2 MAN01P0 SR2 MEM01 SR2 PACK2BD SR2 PACK2FU SR2 PACKBD SR2 PACKFU SR2 SFT01 SR3 B101B SR3 B101BD SR3 B101FU SR3 B102BD
1/35 1/35 1/35 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/16 6/16 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/16 6/16 6/16 6/16 6/16 6/16 6/16 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/14 6/16 6/15 6/15 6/15 6/15
1/47 1/47 1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/22 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/39 1/22 1/22 1/30 1/14 1/14 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/14 1/14 1/14 1/14 1/14 1/35 1/35 1/35 1/33 1/35 1/35 1/35 1/14 1/47 1/47 1/47
TWD XCP RTC TWD XCP RTC TWD XDP PAK1/ TWD XDP PAK2/ TWD XMT5 TWD XMT5
TWD XSM 14 TWD XSM 6 TWD XSM 9 X XBK H70000001M XBK H70000002M XBK H70000004M XBK P50100D10M XBK P50100D20M XBK P50100U10M XBK P50100U20M XBK P61130G30E XBK P61130G31E XBK P61130G32E XBK P61230G30E XBK P61230G31E XBK P61230G32E XBK P62130G30E XBK P62130G32E XBK P62230G30E XBK P62230G32E XBK T50000U08M XBK T50000U10M XBK T50000U11M XBK T60000U00M XBK T60000U10M XBK T60000U11M XBK T70000U00M XBK T80000U00M XBT N200
1/47 1/47 1/47 1/47 1/14 1/35 1/8 and 1/14 1/14 1/8 1/8 and 1/14 1/8 1/14 1/47 1/47 1/8 1/8 and 1/14 1/8 1/8 1/8
XBT N400
XBT N401
4/3 4/3 4/3 4/7 4/7 4/7 4/7 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/9 4/5 4/5 4/5 4/5 4/5 4/5 4/5 4/5 1/8 and 1/14 1/8 and 1/14 1/8 and 1/14 1/33 1/33 1/33
7/3
Technical information
Protective treatment according to climatic environment
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your requirements. In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered : / The prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion. / Only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered.
/ It may also be used where the above limits are only exceeded accidentally or for very short periods, or where temperature variations are not sufficient or fast enough to cause heavy condensation or dripping water on the equipment. TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes, including tropical and equatorial regions, where the equipment is mounted in normal, ventilated industrial locations. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, where the equipment, in tropical regions, is mounted outdoors, or where it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken : / The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). / Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish. / If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided (0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), switched on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself in normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature difference). / For pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided the enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
7/4
Technical information
Protective treatment according to climatic environment
Special characteristics of TH treatment / All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC 112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348). / Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (1) A large number of the Telemecanique brand products are TH treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
Indoors
Unimportant
Unimportant TC
Temperate Equatorial
TC TH
TH TH TH TH TC TH TH TH TH
No dripping water or dew Frequent and regular presence of dripping water or dew
Unimportant
No Yes
Unimportant TC
Continuous Unnecessary Unimportant TC TH These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100.
Special treatments
For highly corrosive industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
7/5
Technical information
Product standards and approvals
Standardisation
Conformity to standards The Telemecanique brand products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and correct practices, these products will allow assembled equipment, machine systems or installations to conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC 60204, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system. On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following: - a declaration of conformity, - a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), - an approval certificate or agreement, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy. Code ANSI BS CEI DIN/VDE EN GOST IEC JIS NBN NEN NF SAA UNE Standards body Name American National Standards Institute British Standards Institution Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov International Electrotechnical Commission Japanese Industrial Standard Institut Belge de Normalisation Nederlands Normalisatie Institut Union Technique de l'Electricit Standards Association of Australia Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certificacion Country Abbreviation ANSI BSI CEI VDE CENELEC GOST IEC JISC IBN NNI UTE SAA AENOR USA Great Britain Italy Germany Europe Russia Worldwide Japan Belgium Netherlands France Australia Spain
European EN standards These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having member or affiliated status). Arrived at through the principle of consensus, the European standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. The European standards are now incorporated within the French standards and carry the prefix NF EN. Under the Technical Union of Electricity (UTE), the French version of the corresponding European standard carries a double notation: European reference (NF EN ) and classification (C ). Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN EN 60947-4-1. Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Telemecanique brand components conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.
Regulations
European Directives Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each member country of the European Union. The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European Union, and it applies to each member country. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved and are referred to as essential requirements. The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production. As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product by affixing a & mark. The & mark is affixed to Telemecanique brand products, as defined by French and European regulations. Significance of the & mark - The & mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern him ; this condition must be met to allow free distrubition and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product subject to one or move of the E.U. Directives. - The & mark is intended solely for national market control authorities. - The & mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.
7/6
Technical information
Product standards and approvals
European Directives (continued) For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. For Telemecanique brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable, depending on the product, in particular: - the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: the & mark relating to this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1997. - the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the & mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1996. ASEFA-LOVAG certification The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Franaise d'Appareils lectriques - Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC). ASEFA is now a member of the European accord group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities forming the membership of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities.
Quality labels
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity. Code Quality label Country CEBEC Comit Electrotechnique Belge Belgium KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands NF Union Technique de l'Electricit France VE sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik Austria SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
Approvals
In some countries, the approval of certain electrical equipment is required by law or by the market. In this case, an approval certificate is issued by the official test authority. Each approved component must bear the relevant quality label when this is mandatory: Code Approval authority Country CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada UL Underwriters Laboratories USA Note on approvals issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: Recognized ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. The component is not approved as a Product for general use because its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the approval symbol. The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component must carry the approval symbol.
Listed (UL)
Note
For further details on a specific product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.
7/7
Technical information
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin. Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices mounted on an enclosure). Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example : enclosure with an opening in the base). Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IP /// code
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB).
1st characteristic numeral : corresponds to protection of the equipment against penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts.
2nd characteristic numeral : corresponds to protection of the equipment against penetration of water with harmful effects.
0 1
Non-protected Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 12.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 2.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter > 1 mm. Dust protected (no harmful deposits).
0 1
Protected against direct contact with the back of the hand (accidental contacts).
15
2
Protected against direct finger contact.
3
Protected against direct contact with a 2.5 mm tool.
60
Protected against rain at an angle of up to 60. Protected against splashing water in all directions. Protected against water jets in all directions.
7
4
5
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
6 5
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
7 6
Dust tight. Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
15 cm min.
1m
Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Protected against the effects of prolonged immersion under specified conditions.
7/8
The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system (IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
Additional letter : corresponds to protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts.
IK // code
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05).
A B C D
h (cm)
Energy (J)
00 01
Non-protected 7.5
h
0,2 kg
02
With a 1 mm wire.
10 17.5 25 35
03 04 05
06 07
0,5 kg h
20 40
1 2
08
1,7 kg h
30
09 10
5 kg h
20 40
10 20
7/9
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Afghanistan Albania Algeria Andorra Angola Anguilla Antartica Antigua & Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Austria voie A Lot C22 Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153 Birostrasse 11 1239 Wien Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Union Village PO Box 3901 - Nassau Floor 1 - Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box 355 - 304 Manama Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202 220004 Minsk Dieweg 3 B - 1180 Brussels Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Chile Schneider Electric Croatia Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Avenida Das Naes Unidas 23223 Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 So Paulo-SP Schneider Electric Singapore Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov 1407 Sofiav Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Kenya Schneider Electric Viet Nam 166, rue de l'Htel de Ville BP12087 - Douala 19, Waterman Avenue M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Cameroon Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 Conchali - Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335 Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District 100004 Beijing Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13 www.schneider-electric.co.cl www.schneider-electric.com.cn Tel.: +237 343 38 84 Fax: +237 343 11 94 Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 Fax: +1 416 752 4203 www.schneider-electric.ca Tel.: +3592 919 42 Fax: +3592 962 44 39 www.schneiderelectric.bg Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34 www.schneider-electric.com.br Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50 Fax : +375 172 23 97 61 Tel.: +3223737711 Fax: +3223753858 www.schneider-electric.be Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91 Fax : +1 242 327 42 91 Tel.: +97 322 7897 Fax: +97 321 8313 www.squared.com Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 Fax: +61 296 29 83 40 Tel.: +431 610 540 Fax: +431 610 54 54 www.schneider.com.au Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 Fax: +54 1 716 88 33 www.schneider-electric.com.ar Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 09 Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 01
# Schneider Electric
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Argentina
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Limited
www.schneider-electric.at
Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Botswana Bouvet island
Brazil
Brunei (Darussalam) Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cambodia Cameroon Canada Cape Verde Caribee Cayman islands Central African Republic Chad Chile China
# Schneider Electric
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
7/10
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Christmas island Cocos (Keeling) islands Colombia Comoros Congo Cook islands Costa Rica
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Calle 45A #102-48 Bogota DC Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Australia 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana, Pavas, San Jos, Costa Rica C.A. Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR - 10000 Zagreb Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 36- N306-Apto1 Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar Playa Habana 28 General Timayia Avenue Kyriakos Building, Block #A301 Larnaca 6046 Thmova 13 Praha 8 - 186 00 Schneider Electric Cameroon Baltorpbakken 14 DK-2750 Ballerup Schneider Electric Egypt Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63 Fax: +1 809 334 66 68 Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 Fax: +45 44 68 5255 www.schneider-electric.dk Tel.: +506 232-60-55 Fax: +506 232-04-26 www.schneider-ca.com Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00 Fax: +57 1 426 97 40
Croatia Cuba
Tel.: +385 1 367 100 Fax: +385 1 367 111 Tel.: +53 724 15 59 Fax: +53 724 12 17
Cyprus
Tel.: +00357 248 12646 Fax: +00357 246 37382 Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49 www.schneider-electric.cz
# Schneider Electric
Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Falkland islands Faroe islands Fiji Finland France French Polynesia French West Indies Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana
Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42 Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94 68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Egypt Ehitajate tee 110 EE 12618 Talinn Schneider Electric Egypt Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Sinimentie 14 02630 Espoo 5, rue Nadar 92500 Rueil Malmaison Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Gothaer Strae 29 D-40880 Ratingen PMB Kia 3rd Floor Opeibea House Airport Commercial Center Liberation road - Accra Schneider Electric Spain 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia GR - 14564 Kifissia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Martinique Schneider Electric Australia Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 Fax: +302 106 29 52 10 www.schneider-electric.com.gr Tel.: +49210 240 40 Fax: +492 10 240 49 256 Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687 Fax : +233 21 77 96 22 www.schneiderelectric.de Tel. : +358 9 527 000 Fax : +358 9 5270 0376 Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20 www.schneider-electric.fi www.schneider-electric.fr Tel. : +372 650 97 00 Fax : +372 650 97 22 Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 Fax: +20 24 01 66 87 www.schneider.com.eg
# Lexel Electric
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Electric AE
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
7/11
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Guatemala Guinea-Bissau Guinea Guyana Haiti Heard & Mac Donald isl. Honduras Hong Kong
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Sngal Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Sun Hung Kai Centre, 30 Harbour Road, Wanchai Fehrvri t 108 112 H-1116 Budapest Schneider Electric Denmark Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla 110 020 New Dehli Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR P.O. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Maynooth Road Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi) Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin 30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown Torigoe F. Bldg 1-8-2, Torigoe Taito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex 2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84 Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61 Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16 Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87 Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27 Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60 Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 Fax: +353+0 1 6012201 Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 Fax: +39 39 605 6237 Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30 Tel. : +1876 755 41 27 Tel. : +931 87 74 Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81 Fax: +81 358 35 35 85 Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87 Fax: 962 65 16 79 1 Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88 Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70 Tel. : +254 2.824.156 Fax : +254 2.824.157 www.schneider-electric.co.jp www.schneiderelectric.ie www.schneiderelectric.it www.schneiderelectric-in.com www.schneider-electric.co.id Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21 Fax: +852 28 11 10 29 Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 Fax: +36 1 206 1429 www.schneider-electric.hu
# Schneider Electric India # P.T. Schneider Indonesia # Telemecanique Iran # Schneider Electric Industries SA # Schneider Electric Ireland # Schneider Electric S.p.A. # Schneider Electric Afrique de
l'Ouest
Jordan
# Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street # Schneider Electric Kazakhstan
Liaison Office
Kazakstan Kenya
Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 480009 Almaty Power Technics Complex Monbasa Road - PO Box 46345 Nairobi Schneider Electric Australia 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku 150-037 Seoul Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Thailand 60A A.Deglava str. LV1035 Riga Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Immeuble Ashada, 8 P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Ghana Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Switzerland 44, Verkiu str. LT-2012 Vilnius Schneider Electric Australia 1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n 35190 57075 Metz cedex 3 - France
Kiribati Korea
www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/
Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75 Fax : +371 754 62 80 Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20 Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Lexel Electric
Contacts are assured by
Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96
www.schneider-electric.fr
7/12
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Macau Macedonia Madagascar Malawi Malaysia
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Bhd Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Bulgaria Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric South Africa Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan Schneider Electric Reunion Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lzarde 97232 Le Lamentin Schneider Electric Senegal Route ctire Calodyne - Mauritius Schneider Electric Reunion Calz. Rojo Gomez N 1121-A Col. Guadalupe del Moral Mxico, D.F. - C.P. 09300 Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Romania Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Singapore Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric India Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 2003 RV Haarlem Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia 14 Charann Place Avondale P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Auckland Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Abeyemo Alakija Street Victoria Islan - Lagos Tel. : +234 1 2702973 Fax : +234 1 2702976 Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90 Fax : +64 9 829 04 91 www.schneider-electric.co.nz Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 Fax: +31 23 512 4100 www.schneider-electric.nl Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69 www.schneider.co.ma Tel.: +525 686 30 00 Fax: +525 686 24 09 www.schneiderelectric.com.mx Tel.: 230 282 18 83 Fax: 230 282 18 84 Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00 Fax: +05 96 51 11 26 Tel. : (603) 7883 6333 Fax : (603) 7883 6188 www.schneiderelectric.com.my
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Electric
# Schneider Electric
Contacts are assured by
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nauru Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Electric BV
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634
Niue Norfolk island North Korea Northern Mariana islands Norway Oman Pakistan Palau Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Australia Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat 43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Gulberg II - Lahore Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Uruguay Tel.: +47 6924 9700 Fax: +47 6925 7871 Tel.: +968 77 163 64 Fax: +968 77 104 49 Tel.: +92 42 5754471 73 Fax: +92 42 5754474 www.schneider-electric.no
7/13
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Peru Philippines # Schneider Electric Peru S.A.
Los Telares n231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 03 391 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Makati 1209 Tel.: +511 348 44 11 Fax: +511 348 05 23 Tel. : +632 896 6063 Fax : +632 896 7229 www.schneider-electric.com.pe
Schneider Electric Australia 03-878 - Warszawa Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200 Fax: +48 22 511 8 210 Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 Fax: +351 21 416 5857 www.schneider-electric.pl www.schneiderelectric.pt
# Schneider Electric Qatar Branch # Schneider Electric # Schneider Electric # Schneider Electric ZAO
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
Tel.: +97 4424358 Fax: +97 4424358 Tel.: +262 28 14 28 Fax: +262 28 39 37 Tel.: +401 203 06 50 Fax: +401 232 15 98 Tel.: +7095 797 40 00 Fax: +7095 797 40 03 www.schneider-electric.ro
Reunion
Romania
Russian Federation Rwanda Samoa San Marino Sandwich & Georgia island Sao Tome & Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore
www.schneider-electric.ru
Tel.: +966 1 265 1515 Fax: +966 1 265 1860 Tel.: +221 820 68 05 Fax: +221 820 58 50
# Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 # Schneider Electric Slovakia spol
s.r.o.
Tel.: +65 484 78 77 Fax: +65 484 78 00 Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 Fax : +02 45 52 40 00 Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555 Fax : +386 1 23 63 559
www.schneider-electric.com.sg
www.schneider-electric.sk www.schneider-electric.si
Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 Fax: +27 11 315 8830 Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 Fax: +34 93 484 3308 Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89
www.schneider-electric.co.za
www.schneiderelectric.es www.schneiderelectric-in.com
St Helena St Kitts & Nevis St Lucia St Pierre et Miquelon St Vincent & Grenadines Sudan Suriname Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Swaziland Sweden Switzerland
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 Fax: +46 8 623 84 85 Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 Fax: +41 31 917 3355
www.schneider-electric.se www.schneider-electric.ch
7/14
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Syrian Arab Republic # Schneider Electric Syria
Elba Street - Malki Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floor PO Box 33876-Damascus Taipei 114 Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00 Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9 www.schneider-electric.com.tw
# Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388
Fax : +886 2 8751 6389 Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Kenya 20th Floor Richmond Building 75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Bangkok 10110 Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia 6, 1st Street West Ext. Beaulieu Avenue Trincity Trinidad West Indies Rue du Lac Oubeira 1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis Tel.: 1868 640 42 04 Fax: 1868 640 42 04 Tel.: +216 71 960 477 Fax: +216 71 960 342 Tel.: +662 204 9888 Fax: +662 204 9816
www.schneider-electric.co.th
Ttnc Mehmet Efendi Cad. N:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Kat 1-2 - 81080 Gztepe Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75 rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, off.326/327 74 000 Achgabad Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Kenya Rue Krechtchalik 2 252601 Kiev PO Box 29580 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower Abu Dhabi Braywick House East Windsor Road - Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 1 DN North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine - IL 60067 Ramon Masini 3190 Montevideo Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Italy Calle 162/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building 364 Cong Hoa Street Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Morocco Schneider Electric U.A.E. Ratarski put 27d 11186 Belgrade Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036 - Accra Road PO Box 22792 - Kitwe Zimbabwe Liaison Office 75A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Harare Tel.: +381 11 192 414 Fax: +381 11 107 125 Tel.: +260 222 22 52 Fax: +260 222 83 89 Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 Fax: +58 2 243 60 09 Tel.: +84 8 8103 103 Fax: +84 8 8120 477 Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 Fax: +380 44 462 04 24 Tel.: +9712 6 339444 Fax: +9712 6 316606 Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52
www.schneiderelectric.com.tr
Turks & Caicos islands Tuvalu Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates
www.schneider-electric.com.ua
United Kingdom
Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508 Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 Fax: +1 847 925 7500 Tel. : +59 82 707 2392 Fax : +59 82 707 2184
www.schneider.co.uk
United States
www.squared.com
www.schneider-electric.com.ve
Viet Nam
Virgin islands Wallis & Futuna islands Western Sahara Yemen Yugoslavia Zambia
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
# Schneider Zambia
Zimbabwe
# Schneider Electric
7/15
MKTED204011EN